<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://wiki.inlogic.dk/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Mmh</id>
	<title>UmsWiki - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://wiki.inlogic.dk/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Mmh"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php/Special:Contributions/Mmh"/>
	<updated>2026-04-20T17:26:07Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.45.1</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=Timetable&amp;diff=2985</id>
		<title>Timetable</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=Timetable&amp;diff=2985"/>
		<updated>2019-07-03T14:14:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmh: /* How do I find timetable blocks with skemabrikker.exe ? */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Skemabrikker.exe is a small sync job that needs to run when timetables are created, updated, or deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example of timetable in UMS and Outlook:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Timetable in UMS and Outlook.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following systems are supported:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Office 365&lt;br /&gt;
*Exchange&lt;br /&gt;
*GSuite&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Parameters==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Usage===&lt;br /&gt;
 Skemabrikker.exe [&amp;lt;optional&amp;gt; System] [&amp;lt;optional&amp;gt; Action] [&amp;lt;optional&amp;gt; Mail] [&amp;lt;optional&amp;gt; StartDate] [&amp;lt;optional&amp;gt; EndDate] [&amp;lt;optional&amp;gt; Type [UMS | NonUMS | All]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Help=====&lt;br /&gt;
Displays Microsoft forms with the different parameters.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Applyrights=====&lt;br /&gt;
Only works for Exchange and Office365. Restores rights for a room if they have accidentally been deleted or changed.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Systems=====&lt;br /&gt;
This parameter is used to define what system Skemabrikker.exe will populate the timetables to. We currently support timetable integration to these systems:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exchange&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Office 365&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
GSuite&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Timetable/itslearning|Itslearning]]&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Action=====&lt;br /&gt;
find - Used to display the timetables associated with the given [mail] parameter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
delete - Used to delete the timetables associated with the given [mail] parameter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
update - Used to update the timetables that needs to be updated and are associated with the given [mail] parameter.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Mail=====&lt;br /&gt;
mail/UPN - This parameter is used if the [action] parameter needs to affect a specific user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Teachersonly - This parameter is used if the [action] parameter needs to affect only teachers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Studentsonly - This parameter is used if the [action] parameter needs to affect only students.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Roomsonly - This parameter is used if the [action] parameter needs to affect only a given physical Classroom (When this parameter is used you need to add the ID for the given room ie. [Action] [Mail] &#039;Room_ID&#039;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Activitiesonly - This parameter is used if the [action] parameter needs to only affect a given activity (When this parameter is used you need to add the ID for the given activity ie. [Action] [Mail] &#039;Activity_ID&#039;).&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====StartDate=====&lt;br /&gt;
This parameter is used to define the start date in which the find, delete, or update parameter will affect the timetables. The format for this parameter is dd-mm-yyyy.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====EndDate=====&lt;br /&gt;
This parameter is used to define the end date in which the find, delete, or update parameter will affect the timetables The format for this parameter is dd-mm-yyyy.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Type=====&lt;br /&gt;
UMS - This parameter is used to define that the timetables that have been generated by UMS, will be effected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NonUMS - This parameter is used to define that the timetables that have not been generated by UMS, will be effected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All - This parameter is used to define that timetables both from UMS and non UMS, will be effected.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==External systems==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[Timetable/itslearning|itslearning]]===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[Timetable/Office365|Office 365]]===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[Timetable/GoogleGSuite|Google GSuite]]===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==FAQ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====How do I find timetable blocks with skemabrikker.exe ?====&lt;br /&gt;
Example following the general parameters:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|skemabrikker.exe  office365 find tea@umsacademic.onmicrosoft.com 12-05-2019 13-05-2019 All&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Inspect the skemabrikker.log. The long string value in the log file refers to the ID in the table &#039;&#039;&#039;SkemaBrikkerSavedEntries_Students, SkemaBrikkerSavedEntries_Teachers, SkemaBrikkerSavedEntries_Rooms, SkemaBrikkerSavedEntries_Activities&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Skemabrikkerlog.png|none|thumb|864x864px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====How do I find timetable blocks with SQL statements?====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Select  SkemaBrikkerNewEntries.*&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From  SkemaBrikkerNewEntries&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Join  SkemaBrikker_Students On SkemaBrikkerNewEntries.SkemaBegivenhed_ID  = SkemaBrikker_Students.SkemaBegivenhed_ID And  SkemaBrikkerNewEntries.SkemaBrikkerAdminServers_ID =  SkemaBrikker_Students.SkemaBrikkerAdminServers_ID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And SkemaBrikkerNewEntries.Activity =  SkemaBrikker_Students.Activity&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Where &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SkemaBrikker_Students.cpr In (Select Cpr from Students where studienr= &#039;xxxxxx&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and SkemaBrikkerNewEntries.Dato = &#039;28-11-2018&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Order By  RealStartDateTime&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====How do I change format and content of timetable blocks in Outlook?====&lt;br /&gt;
Open UMS Configurator, select Modules &amp;quot;TimeTable&amp;quot; and select your datasource, then edit Format And Content&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Variables can be replaced as pictured below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Timetable format and content.png|none|thumb|1152x1152px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmh</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=Timetable&amp;diff=2984</id>
		<title>Timetable</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=Timetable&amp;diff=2984"/>
		<updated>2019-07-03T14:08:49Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmh: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Skemabrikker.exe is a small sync job that needs to run when timetables are created, updated, or deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example of timetable in UMS and Outlook:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Timetable in UMS and Outlook.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following systems are supported:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Office 365&lt;br /&gt;
*Exchange&lt;br /&gt;
*GSuite&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Parameters==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Usage===&lt;br /&gt;
 Skemabrikker.exe [&amp;lt;optional&amp;gt; System] [&amp;lt;optional&amp;gt; Action] [&amp;lt;optional&amp;gt; Mail] [&amp;lt;optional&amp;gt; StartDate] [&amp;lt;optional&amp;gt; EndDate] [&amp;lt;optional&amp;gt; Type [UMS | NonUMS | All]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Help=====&lt;br /&gt;
Displays Microsoft forms with the different parameters.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Applyrights=====&lt;br /&gt;
Only works for Exchange and Office365. Restores rights for a room if they have accidentally been deleted or changed.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Systems=====&lt;br /&gt;
This parameter is used to define what system Skemabrikker.exe will populate the timetables to. We currently support timetable integration to these systems:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exchange&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Office 365&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
GSuite&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Timetable/itslearning|Itslearning]]&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Action=====&lt;br /&gt;
find - Used to display the timetables associated with the given [mail] parameter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
delete - Used to delete the timetables associated with the given [mail] parameter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
update - Used to update the timetables that needs to be updated and are associated with the given [mail] parameter.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Mail=====&lt;br /&gt;
mail/UPN - This parameter is used if the [action] parameter needs to affect a specific user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Teachersonly - This parameter is used if the [action] parameter needs to affect only teachers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Studentsonly - This parameter is used if the [action] parameter needs to affect only students.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Roomsonly - This parameter is used if the [action] parameter needs to affect only a given physical Classroom (When this parameter is used you need to add the ID for the given room ie. [Action] [Mail] &#039;Room_ID&#039;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Activitiesonly - This parameter is used if the [action] parameter needs to only affect a given activity (When this parameter is used you need to add the ID for the given activity ie. [Action] [Mail] &#039;Activity_ID&#039;).&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====StartDate=====&lt;br /&gt;
This parameter is used to define the start date in which the find, delete, or update parameter will affect the timetables. The format for this parameter is dd-mm-yyyy.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====EndDate=====&lt;br /&gt;
This parameter is used to define the end date in which the find, delete, or update parameter will affect the timetables The format for this parameter is dd-mm-yyyy.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Type=====&lt;br /&gt;
UMS - This parameter is used to define that the timetables has to have been generated by UMS will be affected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NonUMS - This parameter is used to define that the timetables has to have not been generated by UMS will be affected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All - This parameter is used to define that timetables both from UMS and non UMS will be affected.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==External systems==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[Timetable/itslearning|itslearning]]===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[Timetable/Office365|Office 365]]===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[Timetable/GoogleGSuite|Google GSuite]]===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==FAQ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====How do I find timetable blocks with skemabrikker.exe ?====&lt;br /&gt;
Example following the general parameters:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|skemabrikker.exe  office365 find tea@umsacademic.onmicrosoft.com 12-05-2019 13-05-2019 All&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Inspect the skemabrikker.log. The long string value in the logfile refers to the ID in the table &#039;&#039;&#039;SkemaBrikkerSavedEntries_Students, SkemaBrikkerSavedEntries_Teachers, SkemaBrikkerSavedEntries_Rooms, SkemaBrikkerSavedEntries_Activities&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Skemabrikkerlog.png|none|thumb|864x864px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====How do I find timetable blocks with SQL statements ?====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|select  SkemaBrikkerNewEntries.*&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From  SkemaBrikkerNewEntries&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Join  SkemaBrikker_Students On SkemaBrikkerNewEntries.SkemaBegivenhed_ID  = SkemaBrikker_Students.SkemaBegivenhed_ID And  SkemaBrikkerNewEntries.SkemaBrikkerAdminServers_ID =  SkemaBrikker_Students.SkemaBrikkerAdminServers_ID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And SkemaBrikkerNewEntries.Activity =  SkemaBrikker_Students.Activity&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Where &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SkemaBrikker_Students.cpr In (Select Cpr from Students where studienr= &#039;xxxxxx&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and SkemaBrikkerNewEntries.Dato = &#039;28-11-2018&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Order By  RealStartDateTime&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====How do I change format and content of timetable blocks in Outlook?====&lt;br /&gt;
Open UMS Configurator, select Modules &amp;quot;TimeTable&amp;quot; and select your datasource, then edit Format And Content&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Variables can be replaced as pictured below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Timetable format and content.png|none|thumb|1152x1152px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmh</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=Timetable&amp;diff=2983</id>
		<title>Timetable</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=Timetable&amp;diff=2983"/>
		<updated>2019-07-03T13:40:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmh: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Skemabrikker.exe is a small sync job that needs to run when timetables are created, updated or deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example of timetable in UMS and Outlook:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Timetable in UMS and Outlook.png|none|thumb|600x600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following systems are supported:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Office 365&lt;br /&gt;
*Exchange&lt;br /&gt;
*GSuite&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Parameters==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Usage===&lt;br /&gt;
 Skemabrikker.exe [&amp;lt;optional&amp;gt; System] [&amp;lt;optional&amp;gt; Action] [&amp;lt;optional&amp;gt; Mail] [&amp;lt;optional&amp;gt; StartDate] [&amp;lt;optional&amp;gt; EndDate] [&amp;lt;optional&amp;gt; Type [UMS | NonUMS | All]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Help=====&lt;br /&gt;
Displays Microsoft forms with the different parameters.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Applyrights=====&lt;br /&gt;
Only works for Exchange and Office365. Restores rights for a room if they have accidentally been deleted or changed.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Systems=====&lt;br /&gt;
This parameter is used to define what system Skemabrikker.exe will populate the timetables to. We currently support timetable integration to these systems:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exchange&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Office 365&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
GSuite&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Timetable/itslearning|Itslearning]]&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Action=====&lt;br /&gt;
find - Used to display the timetables associated with the given [mail] parameter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
delete - Used to delete the timetables associated with the given [mail] parameter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
update - Used to update the timetables that needs to be updated and are associated with the given [mail] parameter.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Mail=====&lt;br /&gt;
mail/UPN - This parameter is used if the [action] parameter needs to affect a specific user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Teachersonly - This parameter used if the [action] parameter needs to only affect teachers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Studentsonly - This parameter used if the [action] parameter needs to only affect students.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Roomsonly - This parameter is used if the [action] parameter needs to only affect a given physical Classroom (When this parameter is used you need to add the ID for the given room ie. [Action] [Mail] &#039;Room_ID&#039;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Activitiesonly - This parameter is used if the [action] parameter needs to only affect a given activity (When this parameter is used you need to add the ID for the given activity ie. [Action] [Mail] &#039;Activity_ID&#039;).&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====StartDate=====&lt;br /&gt;
This parameter is used in to define the start date in which the find, delete or update parameter will affect the timetables. The format for this parameter is dd-mm-yyyy.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====EndDate=====&lt;br /&gt;
This parameter is used in to define the end date in which the find, delete or update parameter will affect the timetables The format for this parameter is dd-mm-yyyy.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Type=====&lt;br /&gt;
UMS - This parameter is used to define that the timetables has to have been generated by UMS will be affected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NonUMS - This parameter is used to define that the timetables has to have not been generated by UMS will be affected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All - This parameter is used to define that timetables both from UMS and non UMS will be affected.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==External systems==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[Timetable/itslearning|itslearning]]===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[Timetable/Office365|Office 365]]===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[Timetable/GoogleGSuite|Google GSuite]]===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==FAQ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====How do I find timetable blocks with skemabrikker.exe ?====&lt;br /&gt;
Example following the general parameters:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|skemabrikker.exe  office365 find tea@umsacademic.onmicrosoft.com 12-05-2019 13-05-2019 All&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Inspect the skemabrikker.log. The long string value in the logfile refers to the ID in the table &#039;&#039;&#039;SkemaBrikkerSavedEntries_Students, SkemaBrikkerSavedEntries_Teachers, SkemaBrikkerSavedEntries_Rooms, SkemaBrikkerSavedEntries_Activities&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Skemabrikkerlog.png|none|thumb|864x864px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====How do I find timetable blocks with SQL statements ?====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|select  SkemaBrikkerNewEntries.*&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From  SkemaBrikkerNewEntries&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Join  SkemaBrikker_Students On SkemaBrikkerNewEntries.SkemaBegivenhed_ID  = SkemaBrikker_Students.SkemaBegivenhed_ID And  SkemaBrikkerNewEntries.SkemaBrikkerAdminServers_ID =  SkemaBrikker_Students.SkemaBrikkerAdminServers_ID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And SkemaBrikkerNewEntries.Activity =  SkemaBrikker_Students.Activity&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Where &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SkemaBrikker_Students.cpr In (Select Cpr from Students where studienr= &#039;xxxxxx&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and SkemaBrikkerNewEntries.Dato = &#039;28-11-2018&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Order By  RealStartDateTime&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====How do I change format and content of timetable blocks in Outlook?====&lt;br /&gt;
Open UMS Configurator, select Modules &amp;quot;TimeTable&amp;quot; and select your datasource, then edit Format And Content&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Variables can be replaced as pictured below.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Timetable format and content.png|none|thumb|1152x1152px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmh</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=Foxbox&amp;diff=2317</id>
		<title>Foxbox</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=Foxbox&amp;diff=2317"/>
		<updated>2019-01-24T14:43:52Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmh: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;UMS SMS Modem.. ( &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Certificate is required for use of Modem&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; )&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;[[File:Foxbox.png|none|thumb|286x286px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Network Port Openings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====TCP port openings from server to modem.====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Port&lt;br /&gt;
!Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|22&lt;br /&gt;
|SSH access&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|80&lt;br /&gt;
|HTTP access&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|443&lt;br /&gt;
|HTTPS access&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3306&lt;br /&gt;
|Database access&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====TCP port openings from modem to server.====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Port&lt;br /&gt;
!Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|80&lt;br /&gt;
|HTTP access&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|443&lt;br /&gt;
|HTTPS access&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Prepare Modem==&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
![[File:Foxbox_OpenModem.png|alt=Inside Foxbox|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
!Insert sim cards (sim2 cardholder is on the backside of the board)&lt;br /&gt;
01 – Plug-in antenna connectors&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
02 – Plug-in Ethernet cable&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
03 – Plug-in power cable&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
04 – Optional serial cable&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
05 – Optional USB extention&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==System Login==&lt;br /&gt;
Once the modem is [[#Prepare Modem|prepared]] and booted (the modem will make a single beep when booted), open a browser and go to &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://192.168.1.2&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; and click login in the upper right corner.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Foxbox Login.png|none|frame|706x706px]]&lt;br /&gt;
A login box will pop up. Login with username &#039;admin&#039; and password &#039;admin&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Foxbox Login Modal.png|none|frame|453x453px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Main Page==&lt;br /&gt;
After logging in, the system info page appears. This page shows status for the modem.[[File:Foxbox index menu closed.png|none|frame|1209x1209px]]Click on [[File:Foxbox menu button.png|frameless|23x23px]] to open the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Foxbox index menu open.png|none|frame|1211x1211px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Network Configuration==&lt;br /&gt;
Go to the menu and click &#039;Network Config&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Change the IP settings and press &#039;Save Configuration&#039;. Go to the &#039;inLogic Modem Settings&#039; page and [[Foxbox#Reboot|reboot]] the modem.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Foxbox Network Config.png|none|frame|1212x1212px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Modem Settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Frontend and Hostname settings===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Frontend====&lt;br /&gt;
Open the menu and go to &#039;inLogic Modem Settings&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Change the &#039;FrontEnd Address&#039; to fit your configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Scroll down and click &#039;Save&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Foxbox Frontend inLogic Modem Settings.png|none|frame|1214x1214px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Hostname===&lt;br /&gt;
Open the menu and go to &#039;inLogic Modem Settings&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set the modem hostname as &#039;FQDN&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Scroll down and click &#039;Save&#039;. The modem will restart.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Foxbox Hostname inLogic Modem Settings.png|none|frame|1209x1209px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====User Settings====&lt;br /&gt;
Open the menu and go to &#039;inLogic Modem Settings&#039; and scroll down to &#039;User Settings&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change default admin user password (default &#039;admin&#039;), write the new password in the Password box, just below admin username.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change default sendsms user password (default &#039;sendsms&#039;), write the new password in the Password box just below sendsms username.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;Save&#039; to confirm password change.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Foxbox UserSettings inLogic Modem Settings.png|none|frame|1205x1205px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===SIM Settings===&lt;br /&gt;
Open the menu and go to &#039;inLogic Modem Settings&#039; and scroll down to &#039;SIM Settings&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enable or disable PIN for modems and set PIN if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;Save&#039; and click [[Foxbox#Reboot|Reboot]].&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Foxbox SIMSettings inLogic Modem Settings.png|none|frame|1212x1212px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Control Panel==&lt;br /&gt;
Open the menu and go to &#039;Control Panel&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here, you can see staus, as well as turn on and off, the SMS Engine.[[File:Foxbox_Control_Panel.png|none|frame|1210x1210px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==SMS==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Inbox===&lt;br /&gt;
To see a log for incoming messages, open the menu and go to &#039;Inbox&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Foxbox Inbox.png|none|frame|1207x1207px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Outbox===&lt;br /&gt;
To see a log for outgoing messages, open the menu and go to &#039;Outbox&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Foxbox Outbox.png|none|frame|1208x1208px]]&lt;br /&gt;
===Write New===&lt;br /&gt;
To write a new SMS, open the menu and go to &#039;Write New&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose the modem you wish to send your message from in the drop down menu &#039;Outgoing channel&#039;. If left blank, the system will choose the first available modem.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the phone number you wish to send your SMS to in the &#039;To&#039; field. Pleas note that international prefix is mandatory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Write your message in the &#039;Message&#039; field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you have finished, click &#039;Send&#039;.[[File:Foxbox Write New.png|none|frame|1210x1210px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Time Zone Settings==&lt;br /&gt;
Open the menu and go to &#039;Time Zone Settings&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The NTP &amp;amp; Time Zone Settings is by default set to enable external NTP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For internal NTP, uncheck the &#039;Enable External NTP&#039; box and write a list of NTP servers separated by comma, in the &#039;Internal NTP&#039; field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change your time zone, choose a time zone from the &#039;Time Zone&#039; drop down menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;Save&#039; to change your settings.[[File:Foxbox Time Zone Settings.png|none|frame|1202x1202px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tools==&lt;br /&gt;
Open the menu and go to &#039;Modem Settings&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
===Shell===&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;in browser&#039; shell to change advanced settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u style=&amp;quot;color:red;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Use with caution!&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; Please note that if you make any changes without consulting us first, support will be charged accordingly with our hourly rate.[[File:Foxbox Shell inLogic Modem Settings.png|none|frame|1197x1197px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Reboot===&lt;br /&gt;
In order to reboot the modem, click on the &#039;Reboot Modem&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Foxbox Reboot inLogic Modem Settings.png|none|frame|1195x1195px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Root Settings===&lt;br /&gt;
Change of root password requires login to shell. Default root password is &#039;odroid&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Login to shell, run password command and follow the instructions on screen.[[File:Foxbox Root inLogic Modem Settings.png|none|frame|1195x1195px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Update certificate==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Step one - creating a certificate.pem file===&lt;br /&gt;
Make sure you have the certificate as a­ . crt or .pem file. You should have received a certificate with a private key from your provider. Some providers send two or more files containing this. To handle the certificate, we need to extract the information from the certificate and private key and combine these two into one certificate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you use notepad to open the certificate (recommended), you will see this:&lt;br /&gt;
 -----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----- &lt;br /&gt;
 Lots of data here...&lt;br /&gt;
 -----END CERTIFICATE-----&lt;br /&gt;
When you open the private key certificate, you should see this:&lt;br /&gt;
 -----BEGIN RSA PRIVATE KEY----- &lt;br /&gt;
 Lots of data here...&lt;br /&gt;
 -----END RSA PRIVATE KEY-----&lt;br /&gt;
Or this:&lt;br /&gt;
 -----BEGIN PRIVATE KEY----- &lt;br /&gt;
 Lots of data here...&lt;br /&gt;
 -----END PRIVATE KEY-----&lt;br /&gt;
Start by creating a new .txt file in a folder and then copy the content of the private key into the new .txt file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, open the certificate file, copy the content and paste it in after the private key.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your file should look like this:&lt;br /&gt;
 -----BEGIN PRIVATE KEY-----&lt;br /&gt;
 MIIEvQIBAD...&lt;br /&gt;
 -----END PRIVATE KEY-----&lt;br /&gt;
 -----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----&lt;br /&gt;
 MIICsjCCAZqgAw...&lt;br /&gt;
 -----END CERTIFICATE-----&lt;br /&gt;
Save the file by selecting all file types instead of .txt and name the file &#039;certificate.pem&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Step two - installation===&lt;br /&gt;
To install the certificate, you will need FTP software (you can freely select the FTP software you prefer).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, connect to the Foxbox using the server&#039;s IP address. This example uses &#039;FileZilla&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Filezilla_foxbox_update_certificate.jpg|none|thumb|839x839px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the client has connected, you will have the folder view where you can navigate to &#039;/etc/sms/scripts&#039;. You can use the folder view to navigate back to the path or you can simply paste the path into the remote site bar and press enter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, you should be able to locate the certificate.pem file inside the folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Continue by navigating the local file view to the new certificate that we created in step 1 and upload it to the Foxbox.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Steep three===&lt;br /&gt;
Open or download the SSH client program. This example uses &#039;putty&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you have the ssh client open, please connect using the Foxbox server&#039;s IP address.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When successfully connected, please use the root user to login, as it is the only user with permissions to restart the apache server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to restart the apache server, please type: &lt;br /&gt;
 /etc/init.d/apache2 restart&lt;br /&gt;
Press enter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the service is restarted successfully, &#039;OK&#039; will appear in green text. If the service was unsuccessful, the error message will appear in red text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After successfully restarting, open the Foxbox url and verify that the certificate has been changed and is valid.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Additional information===&lt;br /&gt;
Additional information about the product, users, and programs used in the tutorial.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Usernames and passwords====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+A list of username and passwords&lt;br /&gt;
!Username&lt;br /&gt;
!Password&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====SSH Clients====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+A list of SSH Clients&lt;br /&gt;
!Program name&lt;br /&gt;
!URL&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|PuTTy&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;https://www.putty.org/&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Open source FTP Client====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+A list of FTP clients&lt;br /&gt;
!Program name&lt;br /&gt;
!URL&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|WinSCP&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;https://winscp.net/eng/index.php&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|FileZilla&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;https://filezilla-project.org/&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
__FORCETOC__&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmh</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=Foxbox&amp;diff=2295</id>
		<title>Foxbox</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=Foxbox&amp;diff=2295"/>
		<updated>2019-01-24T12:27:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmh: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;UMS SMS Modem.. ( &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Certificate is required for use of Modem&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; )&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;[[File:Foxbox.png|none|thumb|286x286px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Network Port Openings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====TCP port openings from server to modem.====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Port&lt;br /&gt;
!Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|22&lt;br /&gt;
|SSH access&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|80&lt;br /&gt;
|HTTP access&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|443&lt;br /&gt;
|HTTPS access&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3306&lt;br /&gt;
|Database access&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====TCP port openings from modem to server.====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Port&lt;br /&gt;
!Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|80&lt;br /&gt;
|HTTP access&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|443&lt;br /&gt;
|HTTPS access&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Prepare Modem==&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
![[File:Foxbox_OpenModem.png|alt=Inside Foxbox|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
!Insert sim cards (sim2 cardholder is on the backside of the board)&lt;br /&gt;
01 – Plug-in antenna connectors&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
02 – Plug-in Ethernet cable&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
03 – Plug-in power cable&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
04 – Optional serial cable&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
05 – Optional USB extention&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==System Login==&lt;br /&gt;
Once modem is [[#Prepare Modem|prepared]] and booted (the modem will make a single beep when booted), browse to &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://192.168.1.2&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; and click login in upper right corner.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Foxbox Login.png|none|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
Login box will popup, and here login with USERNAME: admin and PASSWORD: admin&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Foxbox Login Modal.png|none|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Main Page==&lt;br /&gt;
After login the system info page appears.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Shows status of the modem.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Foxbox index menu closed.png|none|frame]]Click the [[File:Foxbox menu button.png|frameless|23x23px]] to open menu&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Foxbox index menu open.png|none|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Network Configuration==&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Network Config” in menu&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Change IP settings and press “Save Configuration”, [[Foxbox#Reboot|Reboot]] modem on “inLogic Modem Settings” page.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Foxbox Network Config.png|none|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Modem Settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Frontend and Hostname Settings===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Hostname====&lt;br /&gt;
Click “inLogic Modem Settings”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set Modem Hostname as FQDN.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Scroll down and Click “Save” and the modem will restart.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Foxbox Hostname inLogic Modem Settings.png|none|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Frontend====&lt;br /&gt;
Click “inLogic Modem Settings”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Change FrontEnd Address to fit your configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Scroll down and Click “Save”&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Foxbox Frontend inLogic Modem Settings.png|none|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Certificate(https) Settings===&lt;br /&gt;
Click “inLogic Modem Settings” and scroll down to “Certificate(https) Settings”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copy/Paste Certificate from .crt or .pem file into Certificate box (incl. the “-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----” and “-----END CERTIFICATE-----” lines).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copy/Paste Private key into Private key box (incl. the “-----BEGIN RSA PRIVATE KEY-----“ and “-----END RSA PRIVATE KEY-----” lines). Click “Save” and the modem will restart.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Foxbox Certificate inLogic Modem Settings.png|none|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===User Settings===&lt;br /&gt;
In the menu click “inLogic Modem Settings” and scroll down to “User Settings”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change default admin user password (default “admin”), write new password in Password box just below admin username.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change default sendsms user password (default “sendsms”), write new password in Password box just below sendsms username.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Save” to confirm password change.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Foxbox UserSettings inLogic Modem Settings.png|none|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===SIM Settings===&lt;br /&gt;
In the menu click “inLogic Modem Settings” and scroll down to “SIM Settings”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enable / Disable PIN for modems and set PIN if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Save”. After save Click [[Foxbox#Reboot|Reboot]].&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Foxbox SIMSettings inLogic Modem Settings.png|none|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Control Panel==&lt;br /&gt;
In the menu click &amp;quot;Control Panel&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use Control Panel to see State of SMS Engine, turn on/off SMS Engine.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Foxbox_Control_Panel.png|none|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==SMS==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Inbox===&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Inbox” in menu to see a log of incoming messages.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Foxbox Inbox.png|none|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Outbox===&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Outbox” in menu to see a log of outgoing messages.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Foxbox Outbox.png|none|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Write New===&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Write New” in menu to see a log of outgoing messages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;background-color: #FFFF00&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Choose what modem to send from or leave as is to choose first free modem.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;background-color: #00FF00&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Insert mobile phone number to send to. (international prefix is mandatory)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;background-color: #0000FF; color: #FFFFFF&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Write text to send.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Send” to continue.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Foxbox Write New.png|none|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Time Zone Settings==&lt;br /&gt;
Time zone and NTP server settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For External NTP servers check Enable External NTP (default) and choose External NTP Region (Default Europe)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Internal NTP, uncheck Enable External NTP and write comma separated list of NTP servers in Internal NTP textbox.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To set your Time Zone, click Time Zone dropdown and choose your zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click Save to change configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Foxbox Time Zone Settings.png|none|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tools==&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;inLogic Modem Settings&amp;quot; in menu and go to bottom of page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Shell===&lt;br /&gt;
In browser shell to change advanced settings (USE with caution)&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Foxbox Shell inLogic Modem Settings.png|none|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Reboot===&lt;br /&gt;
Reboot modem.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Foxbox Reboot inLogic Modem Settings.png|none|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Root Settings===&lt;br /&gt;
Change of root password requires login to shell.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Login to shell, run passwd command and follow instructions on screen.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Foxbox Root inLogic Modem Settings.png|none|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Update certificate==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Step one===&lt;br /&gt;
Make sure you have the certificate as a­ . crt or .pem file. You should have a certificate with a private key. Some providers send 2 or more files contain this. To handle the certificate, we need to extra the information from the certificate and private key – and combine these two into one certificate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you use notepad to open the certificate, you should see something like this&lt;br /&gt;
 -----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----- &lt;br /&gt;
 Lots of data here...&lt;br /&gt;
 -----END CERTIFICATE-----&lt;br /&gt;
When you open the private key certificate it should look some what similar to this.&lt;br /&gt;
 -----BEGIN RSA PRIVATE KEY----- &lt;br /&gt;
 Lots of data here...&lt;br /&gt;
 -----END RSA PRIVATE KEY-----&lt;br /&gt;
Or something like this&lt;br /&gt;
 -----BEGIN PRIVATE KEY----- &lt;br /&gt;
 Lots of data here...&lt;br /&gt;
 -----END PRIVATE KEY-----&lt;br /&gt;
Now create a new txt file in a folder, copy the content of the private key into the file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After that open the certificate file and copy the content and paste it after the private key.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your file should look something like this:&lt;br /&gt;
 -----BEGIN PRIVATE KEY-----&lt;br /&gt;
 MIIEvQIBAD...&lt;br /&gt;
 -----END PRIVATE KEY-----&lt;br /&gt;
 -----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----&lt;br /&gt;
 MIICsjCCAZqgAw...&lt;br /&gt;
 -----END CERTIFICATE-----&lt;br /&gt;
Now save the file by selecting all files types instead of txt and name the file certificate.pem&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Steep two - installation===&lt;br /&gt;
To install the certificate, you will need FTP software, you can freely select any of these&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After that connect to the foxbox using the IP address of the server. I’m using FileZilla for this example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Filezilla_foxbox_update_certificate.jpg|1186x1186px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the client has connected, and you get the folder view, you can navigate to /etc/sms/scripts, this can be done but using the folder view to navigate back and into the path or you can simple paste the path into remote site bar and press enter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now you should be able to locate the certificate.pem file inside the folder to verify you’re at the correct path.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now navigate the local file view to the new certificate that we created inside step 1 and upload it to the foxbox.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Steep three===&lt;br /&gt;
Now open or download the SSH client program, i’m using putty for this example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you have the ssh client opened, please connect using the IP address of the foxbox server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are connected please use the root user to login as it’s the only user with permissions to restart the apache server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To restart the apache server enter: &lt;br /&gt;
 /etc/init.d/apache2 restart&lt;br /&gt;
And press enter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the service is restarted successfully, there should appear a green text with the text OK, if unsuccessful the text will be written in red contain the error message.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now go the url of the foxbox and verify the certificate has been changed and is valid.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Extra information===&lt;br /&gt;
Extra information about the product, users and programs used in the tutorial.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Usernames and passwords====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+A list of username and passwords&lt;br /&gt;
!Username&lt;br /&gt;
!Password&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====SSH Clients====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+A list of SSH Clients&lt;br /&gt;
!Program name&lt;br /&gt;
!URL&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|PuTTy&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;https://www.putty.org/&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Open source FTP Client====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+A list of FTP clients&lt;br /&gt;
!Program name&lt;br /&gt;
!URL&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|WinSCP&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;https://winscp.net/eng/index.php&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|FileZilla&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;https://filezilla-project.org/&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
__FORCETOC__&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmh</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=Apple_Developer_Account/&amp;diff=1801</id>
		<title>Apple Developer Account/</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=Apple_Developer_Account/&amp;diff=1801"/>
		<updated>2018-12-05T12:50:01Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmh: Redirected page to Apple Developer Account&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#REDIRECT [[Apple Developer Account]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmh</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=Apple_Developer_Account/&amp;diff=1800</id>
		<title>Apple Developer Account/</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=Apple_Developer_Account/&amp;diff=1800"/>
		<updated>2018-12-05T12:49:27Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmh: Created page with &amp;quot;#REDIRECT Apple Developer Account&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#REDIRECT Apple Developer Account&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmh</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=App_Login&amp;diff=1792</id>
		<title>App Login</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=App_Login&amp;diff=1792"/>
		<updated>2018-11-30T12:38:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmh: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The app login page is the first page the teacher/student is shown when logging in. This is where the user inputs their credentials to access their UMS information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After the initial login, the token is stored for 1 year before they have to log in again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Requirements==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*UMS Web&lt;br /&gt;
*UMS App&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Styling==&lt;br /&gt;
See [[App#Styling|App Styling]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Custom text==&lt;br /&gt;
By using our [[Custom Terms and Localization]] module, we&#039;ve added a customizable label below the login input fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By adding a translation entry in your localization file with the following key, you can add whatever custom text you want to show here:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Key: &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;LoginCustomMessage&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Login page app.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmh</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=File:Login_page_app.png&amp;diff=1791</id>
		<title>File:Login page app.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=File:Login_page_app.png&amp;diff=1791"/>
		<updated>2018-11-30T12:37:52Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmh: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Login page app&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmh</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=App&amp;diff=1790</id>
		<title>App</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=App&amp;diff=1790"/>
		<updated>2018-11-30T12:34:32Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmh: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:UMS School App.png|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
UMS School App is available for iPhone, Android and Windows Phone. It will be designed with the school’s own logo, color and style. The app gives the basic functionality to see:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*News&lt;br /&gt;
*Timetable&lt;br /&gt;
*Homework&lt;br /&gt;
*Grades&lt;br /&gt;
*User information&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additional licenses gives the ability to create, edit and see more information from various modules. For an overview of module requirement see &amp;quot;[http://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=App&amp;amp;section=6&amp;amp;wteswitched=1#Additional_functionality Additional functionality&amp;quot;]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Support==&lt;br /&gt;
We provide regular support for the following and newer versions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Android version 7.0. We support the same versions as Google provide security updates for. Find an overview [[wikipedia:Android_version_history|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*iOS version 10 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Windows 10 Mobile (version 10)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that it is possible to run older versions. If support for older versions is needed, we offer support at our hourly rate. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Prerequisites==&lt;br /&gt;
===Supported administrative systems===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Userinfo: Easy-A, SIS and Lectio (Only mobile number).&lt;br /&gt;
*Grades: Easy-A, Lectio and SIS&lt;br /&gt;
*Homework: Easy-A and SIS.&lt;br /&gt;
*Timetable: Easy-A and SIS&lt;br /&gt;
*Attendance registration: Timetable data is retrieved from Easy-A, SIS, LUDUS, Tabulex and Lectio. Howerver, absence is only registered to Easy-A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Module requirements===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*UMS Web (contains and run all the webservice that is required for the app to receive information and communicate with the server)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Additional functionality===&lt;br /&gt;
You get more functionality in the app by having the following modules, these are all optional:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Attendance Registration: Gives “Your attendance”, which shows student statistics, the student are able to add absence reason and see their absence status in the timetable&lt;br /&gt;
*Attendance Registration for UMS School App: gives employee “attendance registration” and student the ability to &amp;quot;report absence&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*Homework: gives the employee the ability to create homework&lt;br /&gt;
*Link Collection: gives links/bookmarks the school can setup&lt;br /&gt;
*User info: gives “Your information” the ability to edit the information. This also adds the functionality for the user to upload a new profile image (a selfie) to be used in the student id card&lt;br /&gt;
*Student &amp;amp; Employee Id: Gives the students a “student id card” and the employees an “employee id card”. To update their student id card profile image you’ll need the “User info” module&lt;br /&gt;
*Parking: Parkzone &amp;amp; APCOA Integration. Gives the option to create and edit parking permits from Parkzone and APCOA&lt;br /&gt;
*User information (add/edit)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: All Attendance functionality requires Attendance Registration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Testing after setup===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The app will be tested internally at inLogic before release. The test requires access to a user with relevant data. You can either create a fictional student who is associated to a real course, or alternatively use a real student&#039;s account, if the person agrees that the account is being used for a system test of the school&#039;s APP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===What to have ready===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Important&#039;&#039;&#039;: The UMS site needs to use HTTPS and be public available. It needs a valid SSL certificate.&lt;br /&gt;
*Materials that can be used for designing the app. For example: Logo, brochure, design guide line, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Optional: It is possible for the school to have its own account where the app is located. An account in the App Store cost $99 per year, while an account for Google Play costs a onetime fee of $25. The school self-manage these accounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Physical hardware requirements===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Having a smartphone is a necessity, either an Android, iOS or a Windows 10 Mobile.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Should third party be contacted===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the school is using a dedicated hosting service, they have to be informed on how you wish the news feed should be setup.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installation and setup==&lt;br /&gt;
inLogic will publish and update the app. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need your own Apple Developer Account for the iOS version, this is a requirements from Apples Guidelines.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[App Store Connect|Please follow the guide App Store Connect]]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Android and Windows Phone can be publish through inLogics account or your schools own account if you have acquired one. If you have your own account inLogic needs to be informed as well. To publish the app, inLogic needs the following information&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[UMS Web]] url path - (If you are running any kind of gateway (TMG, UAG etc.) you will need to create rules for the services on UMS Web, contact us for more information)&lt;br /&gt;
**&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;https://*****.dk/&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Styling==&lt;br /&gt;
To style the app we need the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Primary color&lt;br /&gt;
*Secondary color&lt;br /&gt;
*Logo (.png, vector file: .psd, .ai etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
*Icon for app logo (.png, vector file: .psd, .ai etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The primary color will mostly be used for all static view. Secondary color will be used when something is active or being activated like a button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Optional:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Background image for login (size 1080x1920)&lt;br /&gt;
*Background image for top bar of menu (size 1080x480)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Examples of styling===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Primary and secondary colors&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App - Timetable view.png|none|thumb|Example of primary and secondary colors used in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
The primary color is used in the Header navigation bar, and the secondary color as border on the selected Calendar date&lt;br /&gt;
]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The schools logo - Max. 1024x576&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Branding-af-app-inLogic-logo.png|none|thumb|Example of the inLogic logo used in the Demo app]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*App logo - 1024x1024. If not supplied, inLogic will generate an App logo based on the schools logo&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Simulator Screen Shot - iPhone SE - 2018-05-15 at 12.57.23.png|none|thumb|Example of app logo in use]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Login background image - 1080x1920. If not supplied, a white background will be shown&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App - Login screen.png|none|thumb|Example of a background image used on the Demo app login screen.&lt;br /&gt;
The school logo will be displayed on top of the background image, as seen here&lt;br /&gt;
]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Menu top bar image - 1080x480. If not supplied, a white background will be shown&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App - Sidebar menu.png|none|thumb|Example of an image used on the Demo app menu view]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Technical settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following sections show how to configurate the app. The information only applies to services that is directly connected to the app, i.e. how to set up schedule tasks in the app. The only exception is &#039;UMS RSS Feeds&#039;, which is a specific service for app. If a fully detailed setup guide is needed, please go to that specific module. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some of the configurations are not set up specifically for app, i.e. ParkZone. If you cannot find the setup guide you are looking for, you can find it by searching or on the front page. Please note that some changes made in the configurator not only will affect the app but also UMS Web.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important&#039;&#039;&#039; As many settings only loads once the website is initializing, most changes require an IIS reset on the server. The app retrieves settings from UMS once a day, which means that changes will be visible the next time you log in or the next day.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Menu Settings===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You are able to set the order and which menu buttons should be shown per template for the users&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Open UMS Configurator&lt;br /&gt;
#Templates -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; select a template -&amp;gt; App&lt;br /&gt;
#Under Menu order select Manage -&amp;gt; Add&lt;br /&gt;
#Write a Description&lt;br /&gt;
#Drap and drop the menu you want&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MeunOrderSettings.png|none|thumb|789x789px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Here three menubuttons will be visible to the users on that specific template.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===History===&lt;br /&gt;
Before version 2.0.917, you used to choose the modules displayed in the app via the Configurator -&amp;gt; Web Setup.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have moved the menu order into the Configurator -&amp;gt; Template Editor -&amp;gt; App -&amp;gt; Menu order.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Menu settings history.png|none|thumb|1600x1600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
This change was made to allow a different menu items and orders on Templates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===News===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This describes how to setup news for the app.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*App News created from UMS Web&lt;br /&gt;
*Add a RSS feed&lt;br /&gt;
*Add Facebook feed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to use all three setups together. Combine as you like and set difference feed for difference templates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Setup for App News from UMS Web====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to create or use an existing AD group. This group will have access to create and modify news in&lt;br /&gt;
App News on UMS Web.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Open UMS Configurator&lt;br /&gt;
#Menu -&amp;gt; Web Setup -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; App&lt;br /&gt;
#Add the AD group for News Access group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App newsaccessgroup.png|none|thumb|767x767px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Setup for RSS feed====&lt;br /&gt;
Add server name for the service for RSS feed in Menu -&amp;gt; Modules -&amp;gt; Settings -&amp;gt; RSS Feeds&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App rssfeedservice.png|thumb|none|594x594px]]&lt;br /&gt;
To setup Rss feed you will need the url for the rss. (E.g. http://inlogic.dk/feed)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Menu -&amp;gt; Templates -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; select template -&amp;gt; Rss Feeds&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Manage -&amp;gt; Add… -&amp;gt; Fill in description, feed url and access token&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App rssfeedurl.png|none|thumb|920x920px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; You only need an access token if the feed is from Facebook&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The RSS feed runs as a service called “UMS RSS Feeds”. Default running every 5 min.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App services.png|none|thumb|561x561px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Restart the service to test it and check the output in /UserManagement/RSSFeeds.Log&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App rssfeedlog.png|none|thumb|944x944px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Setup for Facebook news====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to use a Facebook page news feed, you need two things:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Facebook Page Url Feed&lt;br /&gt;
*Access Token&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Facebook Page Url Feed=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create the feed url&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Get your facebook page url&lt;br /&gt;
#*E.g. https://www.facebook.com/inlogic.dk&lt;br /&gt;
#Copy the name. E.g. “inlogic.dk”&lt;br /&gt;
#*Note: this can also be a number “142642699097242”&lt;br /&gt;
#Replace “inlogic.dk” with your name in this url&lt;br /&gt;
#*&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;https://graph.facebook.com/v3.0/inlogic.dk/&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your facebook page url feed should look something like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;https://graph.facebook.com/v3.0/schoolname/&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is your feed URL. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Create a facebook access token=====&lt;br /&gt;
The personal Facebook account that you use to register as a developer does not need to be associated in any way with the page or group whose posts you want to display. You cannot log in to the Developer site using a Facebook Page or Business account. You must use the username and password from your personal Facebook profile. Facebook doesn’t allow businesses to register as developers, only individuals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please follow [https://developers.facebook.com/docs/apps/register Facebook guide] to enable yourself as developer on facebook.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you have a facebook developer account and created an app go to [https://developers.facebook.com/tools/explorer Facebook Graph Explorer]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Select application&lt;br /&gt;
#Select “Get Token” and “Get App Token”&lt;br /&gt;
#Copy the Access Token&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App facebookgettoken.png|none|thumb|968x968px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Now you have the access token you need to paste into the configurator.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App rssfeedurl.png|none|thumb|920x920px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Reload the service UMS Rss Feed in Services and look in the RSS Feed log to validate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Grades===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can set the default view for grades, that filters the grades accordingly. The options are Course, Day and period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Configurator -&amp;gt; Web Setup -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; App -&amp;gt; Default grade view&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App gradesview.png|none|thumb|801x801px]]&lt;br /&gt;
To specific the period you can set how your terms are set with start and end day for each period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Configurator -&amp;gt; Modules -&amp;gt; Grades -&amp;gt; Select the Datasource -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; Terms&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App gradesterms.png|none|thumb|706x706px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on which administration system you’re exporting grades from the columns can vary. You can set which grades column should be used and in which order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Configurator -&amp;gt; Web Setup -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; App -&amp;gt; Select grade columns&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App gradescolumns.png|none|thumb|709x709px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The grades view in the App will change accordingly to which columns chosen, a max of 4 columns will be shown in the App. The columns will be shown for each grade in order from 1 to 4.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If no grade columns settings is made the default columns will be selected in the following order:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*EducationDescription&lt;br /&gt;
*CourseDescription&lt;br /&gt;
*EvaluationFormDescription&lt;br /&gt;
*GradeValue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Your information===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can select which fields in user information that should be editable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Configurator -&amp;gt; Web Setup -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; Userinfo&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App userinfo.png|none|thumb|800x800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
You need to set permission before the users are able to upload their own student photo (a selfie).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Configurator -&amp;gt; Web Setup -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; UMS Photo -&amp;gt; Enable Selfie in App&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App userinfoselfie.png|none|thumb|802x802px]]&lt;br /&gt;
This will enable selfie function.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Student ID And Employee ID===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;This content has been moved to [[Student / Employee ID]]&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===My Absence===&lt;br /&gt;
----The students are able to write an absence reason on an already registered subject. This can be enabled in the template editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the template -&amp;gt; Absence -&amp;gt; Manage -&amp;gt; Create a new settings or select an existing one -&amp;gt; Add/Edit&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Check &amp;quot;Allow students to register absence reason&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Absence settings.png|none|thumb|570x570px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Allow students to register absence reason&#039;&#039;&#039; will allow the students to set an absence reason when a teacher has set the student as absent. The student can set an absence reason in &amp;quot;My absence&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Days back&#039;&#039;&#039; is the number of days back the students are allowed to set an absence reason.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Show Course&#039;&#039;&#039; will show the course view (this will effect both web and app).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Show Activity&#039;&#039;&#039; will show the activity view (this will effect both web and app).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Push Notification===&lt;br /&gt;
----UMS can send push notifications when there are news, grades, or changes in your timetable. It is possible to receive a daily notification with your timetable for the day.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition the app can receive [[SMS Alert]] messages. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To set up push notifications go to Web Setup -&amp;gt; App -&amp;gt; Manage -&amp;gt; Add&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AppPushNotificationSettings.png|none|thumb|526x526px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set the description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
FCM Server Api Key:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Receive the key string from inLogic and paste it&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Windows Phone:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Receive the Package SID and Client secret from inLogic and paste the strings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====School account====&lt;br /&gt;
In case the school has it&#039;s own account do the following to retrieve the information&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
FCM Server Api Key:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Open https://play.google.com/apps/publish&lt;br /&gt;
#Google Play Console -&amp;gt; Settings -&amp;gt; API Access -&amp;gt; Create linked project and open it -&amp;gt; Credentials&lt;br /&gt;
#Create API Key&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the API Key and make key restriction for Android&lt;br /&gt;
#Type in your package name and SHA-1 certificate fingerprint&lt;br /&gt;
#Copy the API key and paste it inside FCM Server API Key&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Windows Phone:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Open https://developer.microsoft.com/en-us/dashboard/apps/overview&lt;br /&gt;
#Select your app&lt;br /&gt;
#Services -&amp;gt; Push notification -&amp;gt; WNS/MPNS&lt;br /&gt;
#Select &amp;quot;Live Services site&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#Copy and paste the Package SID into the configurator&lt;br /&gt;
#Generate an Application Secret if none exist&lt;br /&gt;
#Copy and paste the Application Secret into the configurator (This is the Client Secret)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Links===&lt;br /&gt;
----[[UMS Links]] can be used by both UMS Web and UMS App. Check the [[UMS Links|guide]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Homework===&lt;br /&gt;
----See [[UMS Homework]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Parking===&lt;br /&gt;
----See [[Parking]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Notify absence===&lt;br /&gt;
----See [[Attendance Registration#SMS and App settings for notify absence|App settings for notify absence in attendance registration]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Sms Alert===&lt;br /&gt;
----See [[SMS Alert]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Privacy Policy===&lt;br /&gt;
----To add your own privary policy in the app go to Web Setup -&amp;gt; App&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Insert into &amp;quot;Privacy Policy Url:&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If left empty it will default to inLogic&#039;s privacy policy &amp;quot;https://www.inlogic.dk/om-inlogic/privacy-policy/&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App privacypolicyurl.png|none|thumb|792x792px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add it to the App Store login &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#https://appstoreconnect.apple.com/&lt;br /&gt;
#My Apps&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the app&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the top menu App Store&lt;br /&gt;
#Select App Information in the left menu&lt;br /&gt;
#Add your privacy policy url to &amp;quot;Privacy Policy URL&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App appstore privacypolicy.png|none|thumb|955x955px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==FAQ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Untrusted Certificate Error on Android===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;We do not recommend using Comodo certificates since they have been known to cause these issues.&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Can&#039;t login on some Android devices? This could be due to an untrusted Comodo SSL Certificate. We were able to reproduced it on Android version 4.1, 4.4.2, 5.0.1 and 8.1.0, but it may be present on any number of versions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can test your SSL certificate on https://sslanalyzer.comodoca.com/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do the following on the server&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Delete the Comodo RSA Certification Authority issued by Comodo RSA Certification Authority with an expiration date of January 18, 2038.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enable automatic root certificate updates on the server&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please checkout the Comodo support site: https://support.comodo.com/index.php?/Knowledgebase/Article/View/1019/38/untrusted-certificate-error-on-android&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For future conservation:&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;Certificate is not installed correctly; the certificate needs to be chained back to the Addtrust root certificate in order to be trusted on the Android.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;The issue is that the Windows server is not presenting the complete certificate chain; clients which do not have the complete certificate chain will result in this error as encountered on the Android phone. In order to resolve this, on the server which this certificate is installed on, please open the MMC (Microsoft Management Console), and add the certificate snap-in for the computer account on the local computer.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;In the Intermediate Certification Authorities folder, verify if the Comodo RSA Domain Validation Secure Server CA and Comodo RSA Certification Authority(issued to Comodo RSA Certification Authority, issued by AddTrustExternal CA Root) are installed in this certificate store.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;In the Trusted Root Certification Authorities folder verify if the AddTrustExternal CA Root is installed.  Also, if you see the Comodo RSA Certification Authority (issued to and issued by Comodo RSA Certification Authority with an expiration date of January 18, 2038) is present, if it is please delete this certificate.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;If any of these certificates are missing  the intermediate and root certificates were provided to you in the .zip file when the certificate was issued, or are available via this support article - &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;https://support.comodo.com/index.php?/Default/Knowledgebase/Article/View/979/108/domain-validation-sha-2&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; .&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;If you had to delete the Comodo RSA Certification Authority from the Trusted Root Authorities folder, you will also need to disable automatic root certificate updates on the server - https://support.comodo.com/index.php?/Default/Knowledgebase/Article/View/769/17/turn-off-automatic-root-certificates-updates-server-2008&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;If you have performed these steps and the certificate chain has not updated on the server, to force IIS to update the certificate chain you will need to either change the certificate binding in IIS to another certificate, and then switch the certificate bindings to the correct certificate. Alternately, you will need to restart the server.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;Conservation for https://support.comodo.com/index.php?/Default/Knowledgebase/Article/View/769/17/turn-off-automatic-root-certificates-updates-server-2008&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;To perform this procedure, you must be a member of the local Administrators group, or you must have been delegated the appropriate authority.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;To turn off Automatic Root Certificates Update:&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;1. Click Start, and then click Run.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;2. Type gpedit.msc, and then click OK.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;3. If the User Account Control dialog box appears, confirm that the action it displays is what you want, and then click Continue.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;4. Double-click Administrative Templates, double-click System, double-click Internet Communication Management, and then click Internet Communication settings.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;5. Double-click Turn off Automatic Root Certificates Update, click Enabled, and then click OK.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;6. Close the Local Group Policy Editor.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;Note: You can use Group Policy to set policy settings that apply across a given site, domain, or organizational unit in Active Directory Domain Services.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmh</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=App_Login&amp;diff=1789</id>
		<title>App Login</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=App_Login&amp;diff=1789"/>
		<updated>2018-11-30T12:30:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmh: /* Custom text */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The app login page is the first page the teacher/student is shown when logging in. This is where the user inputs their credentials to access their UMS information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After the initial login, the token is stored for 1 year before they have to log in again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Requirements==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*UMS Web&lt;br /&gt;
*UMS App&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Styling==&lt;br /&gt;
See [[App#Styling|App Styling]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Custom text==&lt;br /&gt;
By using our [[Custom Terms and Localization]] module, we&#039;ve added a customizable label below the login input fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By adding a translation entry in your localization file with the following key, you can add whatever custom text you want to show here:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Key: &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;LoginCustomMessage&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App - Login screen.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmh</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=File:Branding-af-app-inLogic-logo.png&amp;diff=1778</id>
		<title>File:Branding-af-app-inLogic-logo.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=File:Branding-af-app-inLogic-logo.png&amp;diff=1778"/>
		<updated>2018-11-30T09:17:08Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmh: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Branding af app inLogic logo&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmh</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=InLogic_SMS_Modem&amp;diff=1627</id>
		<title>InLogic SMS Modem</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=InLogic_SMS_Modem&amp;diff=1627"/>
		<updated>2018-10-10T07:42:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmh: Redirected page to InLogic SMS Gateway&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#REDIRECT [[inLogic SMS Gateway]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmh</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=InLogic_SMS_Modem&amp;diff=1626</id>
		<title>InLogic SMS Modem</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=InLogic_SMS_Modem&amp;diff=1626"/>
		<updated>2018-10-10T07:41:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmh: Replaced content with &amp;quot;#REDIRECT inLogic SMS Gateway&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#REDIRECT inLogic SMS Gateway&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmh</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=Google_Apps&amp;diff=1561</id>
		<title>Google Apps</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=Google_Apps&amp;diff=1561"/>
		<updated>2018-09-18T07:38:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmh: Redirected page to G Suite&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#REDIRECT [[G Suite]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
UMS integrates to Google Apps with the module Google Apps Sync which:&lt;br /&gt;
* Creates users and their e-mail accounts&lt;br /&gt;
* Maintains users in Google Apps, i.e. data changes are synchronised to UMS&lt;br /&gt;
* Synchronises passwords&lt;br /&gt;
* Deletes users who no longer attend the school &lt;br /&gt;
Integration to Google Apps quickly becomes profitable. With UMS, the school saves resources by automating many manual tasks&lt;br /&gt;
* Avoid having to program scripts to synchronise the data&lt;br /&gt;
* Users are automatically created with data from your student administration system&lt;br /&gt;
* It reduces the workload for the IT-department&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Prerequisites ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Supported administrative systems ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Module requirements ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[UMS]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Additional functionality ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Testing after setup ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== What to have ready ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Is any physical item required ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Should third party be contacted ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Installation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Google Apps&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappsadminsettings.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter Admin credentials for a service account with administrator privileges to access Office 365.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &#039;&#039;&#039;“Mail Alias”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose what to use as the users mail address (login).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Disable users”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When marked the users will be disabled when they are no longer attending classes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &#039;&#039;&#039;“Delete users”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose if users are to be deleted after grace period has ended.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &#039;&#039;&#039;“Forward mail to on premise mail server”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will forward the users Office 365 mail to the primary mail address from AD (If user does not have a proxy address it will read it from the mail attribute)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Keep inactive before deleting x days”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specify a grace period where users are disabled. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Distribution lists&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Maintain lists”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mark this to create distribution groups in Office 365. The groups will be created, updated and deleted if this is specified.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Delete lists”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mark this to delete distributions groups when they are no longer active in the administrative system. Check the data export manuals too when this happens&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Delete unused lists after x days”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specify in days how long the distribution groups are to be kept alive in Office 365 before deletion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Only senders inside my organization”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With this marked only users in the domain will be able to send to distribution groups created by UMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Template security groups&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Maintain”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will create the security group entered in the field “template security group” in the destination node in the template settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Timetable&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Maintain”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mark this to create timetable blocks in Google Apps. They will be created, updated and deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Delete old”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mark this to delete old timetable blocks from calendars.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== &#039;&#039;Site&#039;&#039; ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappssite.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Automation type”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Full: Means that site maintenance will be fully automated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Remove learner method”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Deleted in AD”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users will be removed from site when they are not active in UMS anymore&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Finished on activity/course”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users will be removed when they have finished with the course. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Delete sites”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Auto delete”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sites will be delete when the last student has left the site&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Manual Delete”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sites will not be deleted by UMS. This has to be done by an administrator&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Send mail to teacher(s)”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Send mail notification to teachers when they are attached to a site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Create x days before”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose how many days before start that the sites are to be created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Delete x days after end”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose how many days after end that the sites are to be deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &#039;&#039;&#039;“Teacher rights on sites”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rights the teacher will have on the site when attached.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Learner rights on sites”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rights the student/learner will have on the site when attached.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== &#039;&#039;&#039;SQL Groups&#039;&#039;&#039; ===&lt;br /&gt;
Members of these groups will be attached to all sites created with this setting as teachers&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappssqlgroups.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Group name”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This can only be a group that is found in UMS &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You get a list of these groups by running this SQL command:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select Distinct Aktivitet As Activity From Students Order By Activity&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Activity Sites”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Do not create”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will not create any sites based on activities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“LMS has to be checked”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The field Aktivitet_LMS in the students table has to be “True”. (Look in the documentation for the specific administrative system to see how this is set)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Based on template filter”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create sites based on a filter that is specified per template.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappsactivitysites.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“All”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create all sites.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Title of the site. Changing this after a site has been created will cause it to be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Description of the site. Changing this after a site has been created will cause it to be updated.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== &#039;&#039;&#039;Search filter and criteria&#039;&#039;&#039; ===&lt;br /&gt;
This will enable you to concatenate sites that would have been created as to or more sites to be created as one site.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappssearchfilters.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Remarks”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is just for description purposes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Filter”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The SQL like filter (regular expression). If an activity matches, it will be subject to the settings below in semester roll&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Semester roll”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Use replace string with empty”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will replace a section of the site with an empty string.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                            &#039;&#039;&#039;“Start index”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Determine where to start in string to remove.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                            &#039;&#039;&#039;“Length”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How many characters will be removed from the string.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“&#039;&#039;&#039;Add activity short description to node ID&#039;&#039;&#039;“&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will add the field Kort_Betegnelse (Short Description) from the students table to the node id.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Node id is the URL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== &#039;&#039;&#039;Examples&#039;&#039;&#039; ====&lt;br /&gt;
If you have three activities named English1, English2, English3 and you only want one SharePoint site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set the settings as shown below&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappsseachfilters2.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This filter ensures that it is only applied to activities that matches this SQL sentence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Course Sites”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Course URL’s will always be created as “activity_course”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Do not create”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will not create any sites based on courses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“LMS has to be checked”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The field Skolefag_LMS in the students table has to be “True”. (Look in the documentation for the specific administrative system to see how this is set)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Based on template filter”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create sites based on a filter that is specified per template.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappsactivitysites.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“All”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create all sites.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Title of the site. Changing this after a site has been created will cause it to be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Description of the site. Changing this after a site has been created will cause it to be updated.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Search filter and criteria&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will enable you to concatenate sites that would have been created as two or more sites to be created as one site.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappsseachfilters3.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Remarks”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is just for description purposes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Course Filter”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The SQL like filter (regular expression). If an activity matches, it will be subject to the settings below in semester roll.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Semester roll”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Use replace string with empty”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will replace a section of the site with an empty string.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                            &#039;&#039;&#039;“Start index”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Determine where to start in string to remove.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Length”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How many characters will be removed from the string.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Activity Filter”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The SQL like filter (regular expression). If an activity matches, it will be subject to the settings below in semester roll&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Semester roll”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Use replace string with empty”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will replace a section of the site with an empty string.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                            &#039;&#039;&#039;“Start index”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Determine where to start in string to remove.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Length”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How many characters will be removed from the string.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== &#039;&#039;Drive&#039;&#039; ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappsdrive.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Automation type”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Full: Means that drive maintenance will be fully automated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Remove learner method”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Deleted in AD”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users will be removed from drive when they are not active in UMS anymore&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Finished on activity/course”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users will be removed when they have finished with the course. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Delete drives”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Auto delete”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Drives will be delete when the last student has left the drive&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Manual Delete”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Drives will not be deleted by UMS. This has to be done by an administrator&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Send mail to teacher(s)”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Send mail notification to teachers when they are attached to a drive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Create x days before”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose how many days before start that the drives are to be created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Delete x days after end”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose how many days after end that the drives are to be deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &#039;&#039;&#039;“Teacher rights on drives”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rights the teacher will have on the drive when attached.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Learner rights on drives”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rights the student/learner will have on the drive when attached.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“SQL Groups”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Members of these groups will be attached to all drives created with this setting as teachers&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappssqlgroups.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Group name”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This can only be a group that is found in UMS &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You get a list of these groups by running this SQL command:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select Distinct Aktivitet As Activity From Students Order By Activity&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Activity Drives”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Do not create”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will not create any sites based on activities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“LMS has to be checked”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The field Aktivitet_LMS in the students table has to be “True”. (Look in the documentation for the specific administrative system to see how this is set)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Based on template filter”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create sites based on a filter that is specified per template.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappsactivitysites.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“All”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create all drives.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Description of the drive. Changing this after a drive has been created will cause it to be updated.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Search filter and criteria&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will enable you to concatenate drives that would have been created as to or more drives to be created as one drive.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappssearchfilters.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Remarks”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is just for description purposes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Filter”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The SQL like filter (regular expression). If an activity matches, it will be subject to the settings below in semester roll&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Semester roll”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Use replace string with empty”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will replace a section of the drive with an empty string.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                            &#039;&#039;&#039;“Start index”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Determine where to start in string to remove.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                            &#039;&#039;&#039;“Length”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How many characters will be removed from the string.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“&#039;&#039;&#039;Add activity short description to node ID&#039;&#039;&#039;“&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will add the field Kort_Betegnelse (Short Description) from the students table to the node id.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Node id is the URL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Examples&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have three activities named English1, English2, English3 and you only want one SharePoint drive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set the settings as shown below&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappsseachfilters2.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This filter ensures that it is only applied to activities that matches this SQL sentence. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Course Drives”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Course URL’s will always be created as “activity_course”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Do not create”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will not create any drives based on courses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“LMS has to be checked”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The field Skolefag_LMS in the students table has to be “True”. (Look in the documentation for the specific administrative system to see how this is set)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Based on template filter”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create drives based on a filter that is specified per template.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappsactivitysites.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“All”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create all drives.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Description of the drive. Changing this after a drive has been created will cause it to be updated.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Search filter and criteria&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will enable you to concatenate drives that would have been created as two or more drives to be created as one drive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappsseachfilters3.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Remarks”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is just for description purposes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Course Filter”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The SQL like filter (regular expression). If an activity matches, it will be subject to the settings below in semester roll.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Semester roll”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Use replace string with empty”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will replace a section of the drive with an empty string.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                            &#039;&#039;&#039;“Start index”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Determine where to start in string to remove.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Length”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How many characters will be removed from the string.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Activity Filter”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The SQL like filter (regular expression). If an activity matches, it will be subject to the settings below in semester roll&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Semester roll”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Use replace string with empty”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will replace a section of the drive with an empty string.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                            &#039;&#039;&#039;“Start index”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Determine where to start in string to remove.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Length”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How many characters will be removed from the string.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  === &#039;&#039;Classroom&#039;&#039; ===&lt;br /&gt;
There can only be a maximum of 990 classrooms in total in one organization. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Google designed features (Not UMS)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a teacher leaves the school, the material that he has put into classrooms will be deleted as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a user has too many classrooms it will be very slow for this user.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappsclassroomsettings.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Automation type”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Full: Means that classroom maintenance will be fully automated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Remove learner method”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Deleted in AD”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users will be removed from classroom when they are not active in UMS anymore&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Finished on activity/course”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users will be removed when they have finished with the course.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Delete classrooms”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Auto delete”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Classrooms will be delete when the last student has left the classroom&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Manual Delete”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Classrooms will not be deleted by UMS. This has to be done by an administrator&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Send mail to teacher(s)”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Send mail notification to teachers when they are attached to a classroom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Create x days before”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose how many days before start that the classroom s are to be created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Delete x days after end”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose how many days after end that the classroom s are to be deleted.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“SQL Groups”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Members of these groups will be attached to all classrooms created with this setting as teachers&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappssqlgroups.png|link=http://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php/File:Googleappssqlgroups.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Group name”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This can only be a group that is found in UMS &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You get a list of these groups by running this SQL command:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select Distinct Aktivitet As Activity From Students Order By Activity&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Activity Classroomss”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Do not create”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will not create any sites based on activities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“LMS has to be checked”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The field Aktivitet_LMS in the students table has to be “True”. (Look in the documentation for the specific administrative system to see how this is set)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Based on template filter”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create sites based on a filter that is specified per template.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappsactivitysites.png|link=http://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php/File:Googleappsactivitysites.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“All”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create all classrooms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Description of the classroom. Changing this after a classroom has been created will cause it to be updated.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Search filter and criteria&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will enable you to concatenate classrooms that would have been created as to or more classrooms to be created as one classroom.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappssearchfilters.png|link=http://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php/File:Googleappssearchfilters.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Remarks”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is just for description purposes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Filter”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The SQL like filter (regular expression). If an activity matches, it will be subject to the settings below in semester roll&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Semester roll”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Use replace string with empty”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will replace a section of the classroom with an empty string.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                            &#039;&#039;&#039;“Start index”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Determine where to start in string to remove.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                            &#039;&#039;&#039;“Length”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How many characters will be removed from the string.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“&#039;&#039;&#039;Add activity short description to node ID&#039;&#039;&#039;“&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will add the field Kort_Betegnelse (Short Description) from the students table to the node id.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Node id is the URL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Examples&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have three activities named English1, English2, English3 and you only want one SharePoint classroom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set the settings as shown below&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappsseachfilters2.png|link=http://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php/File:Googleappsseachfilters2.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This filter ensures that it is only applied to activities that matches this SQL sentence. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Course Classrooms”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Course URL’s will always be created as “activity course”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Do not create”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will not create any classrooms based on courses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“LMS has to be checked”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The field Skolefag_LMS in the students table has to be “True”. (Look in the documentation for the specific administrative system to see how this is set)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Based on template filter”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create classrooms based on a filter that is specified per template.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappsactivitysites.png|link=http://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php/File:Googleappsactivitysites.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“All”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create all classrooms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Description of the classroom. Changing this after a classroom has been created will cause it to be updated.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Search filter and criteria&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will enable you to concatenate classrooms that would have been created as two or more classrooms to be created as one classroom.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappsseachfilters3.png|link=http://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php/File:Googleappsseachfilters3.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Remarks”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is just for description purposes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Course Filter”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The SQL like filter (regular expression). If an activity matches, it will be subject to the settings below in semester roll.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Semester roll”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Use replace string with empty”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will replace a section of the classroom with an empty string.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                            &#039;&#039;&#039;“Start index”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Determine where to start in string to remove.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Length”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How many characters will be removed from the string.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Activity Filter”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The SQL like filter (regular expression). If an activity matches, it will be subject to the settings below in semester roll&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Semester roll”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Use replace string with empty”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will replace a section of the classroom with an empty string.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                            &#039;&#039;&#039;“Start index”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Determine where to start in string to remove.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Length”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How many characters will be removed from the string.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  === &#039;&#039;&#039;Organization Settings&#039;&#039;&#039; ===&lt;br /&gt;
When creating a user for Google refer to this PDF &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
http://downloads.inlogic.dk/manualer/GoogleAppsSync.pdf&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappsorganizationsettings.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Description”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add a description to be able to identify the account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Admin login”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mail address of an administrative user&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &#039;&#039;&#039;“Password”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Password for the admin login specified&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Domain”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The google domain that is used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Client ID”, “Client Secret”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is obtained when following the instructions in the PDF document&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Refresh token”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will be generated the first time google synchronization is started. If this is reset UMS will asked for it again when the next synchronization is run.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Timetable Users”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This can be used when creating timetable blocks. Look in timetable documentation for this feature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Template Settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you specify which templates are synchronized with Google and how.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappstemplateeditor.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Setting”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the setting described above  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Organization setting”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specify where the users are created&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappsaosettings.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Path&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is where all users is placed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Use this path when below 13 years of age&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is where users that are under 13 years is placed. If this is not specified everyone will be placed under the path setting. (This is helpful when it comes to Google+)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;OU Description&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The description that is set on the OU when it is created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Site settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings used when creating sites from this template &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappssitesettings.png|none|thumb]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Site category&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A list of categories added to the site when creating it separated with a ;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A category called UMS will be added aswell. (This cannot be change)  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“SQL Groups”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Members of these groups will be attached to all sites created with this setting as teachers&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappssqlgroups.png|link=http://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php/File:Googleappssqlgroups.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Group name”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This can only be a group that is found in UMS &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You get a list of these groups by running this SQL command:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select Distinct Aktivitet As Activity From Students Order By Activity&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Drive settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings used when creating drives from this template &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappsdrivesettings.png|none|thumb]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Path”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The path where the drives are created&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Create user specific subfolder&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create a folder for each student that is attached to each drive&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Suffix&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A text string that is appended to the folder name&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Create subfolder (Teacher Read/Write - Student Read)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A folder where teachers can upload data that students can only read&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Suffix&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A text string that is appended to the folder name&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Create subfolder (Teacher Read/Write - Student Read/Write)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A folder where teachers and students can share data both with read/write&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Suffix&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A text string that is appended to the folder name&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappsstudents.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“SQL Groups”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Members of these groups will be attached to all sites created with this setting as teachers&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappssqlgroups.png|link=http://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php/File:Googleappssqlgroups.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Group name”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This can only be a group that is found in UMS &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You get a list of these groups by running this SQL command:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select Distinct Aktivitet As Activity From Students Order By Activity&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Classroom settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings used when creating classrooms from this template  &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappsclassroomsettings2.png|none|thumb]]  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“SQL Groups”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Members of these groups will be attached to all sites created with this setting as teachers&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappssqlgroups.png|link=http://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php/File:Googleappssqlgroups.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Group name”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This can only be a group that is found in UMS &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You get a list of these groups by running this SQL command:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select Distinct Aktivitet As Activity From Students Order By Activity&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Installation Google Apps Sync ==&lt;br /&gt;
Steps to make UMS sync work with Google Apps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Log on &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;https://console.developers.google.com&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; with your Google Admin account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create a project&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googlesyncproject2.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When created choose project and click the newly created project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose “Enable and manage APIs”. Enable these APIs&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googlesyncenableapi.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click credentials&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And choose “OAuth client ID”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose settings as show on below image. Name can be changed.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googlesyncoauth.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then choose “Create”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Which creates an OAuth 2.0 client ID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter Client ID and Client Secret into UMS&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googlesyncoauth2.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go back to “Overview” and choose “Enabled APIs”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on each API you added and choose Quota &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googlesyncenableapi2.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set the number as high as you can without “apply for higher quota”&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googlesyncapplyhighquota.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And you are done with this site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now Log on https://admin.google.com with your Google Admin account&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Find “Other Google Services” - can be located under “More Controls” or under APPS aplaced at page bottom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click “add services” upper right corner&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then click “Add it now” on “Groups for Business”&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googlesyncservices.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Back to start and choose “Security”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose “API reference” and check “Enable API access”&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googlesyncsecurity.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to the UMS “usermanagement folder” and run “GoogleApps_Sync.exe” manually. And “Accept” the following&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googlesyncaccept.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
If you get a “This page can’t be displayed”&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googlesyncpagenotfound.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not be alarmed. The job has been activated and you can check your GoogleApps_Sync.log to confirm that the job has completed running.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Technical settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== FAQ ==&lt;br /&gt;
Why do I not get the drive/site created?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.      Activity&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
a.     Is there a user on the activity with a primary template that has an office 365 setting attached&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
b.     Is the flag Aktivitet_LMS = True&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.     Course&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
a.     Is there a user on the course with a primary template that has an office 365 setting attached&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
b.     Is the flag Skolefag_LMS = True&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmh</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=G_Suite&amp;diff=1560</id>
		<title>G Suite</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=G_Suite&amp;diff=1560"/>
		<updated>2018-09-18T07:36:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmh: Google Apps has changed their name to G Suite&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;UMS integrates to G Suite with the module G Suite Sync which:&lt;br /&gt;
* Creates users and their e-mail accounts&lt;br /&gt;
* Maintains users in G Suite, i.e. data changes are synchronised to UMS&lt;br /&gt;
* Synchronises passwords&lt;br /&gt;
* Deletes users who no longer attend the school &lt;br /&gt;
Integration to G Suite quickly becomes profitable. With UMS, the school saves resources by automating many manual tasks&lt;br /&gt;
* Avoid having to program scripts to synchronise the data&lt;br /&gt;
* Users are automatically created with data from your student administration system&lt;br /&gt;
* It reduces the workload for the IT-department&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Prerequisites ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Supported administrative systems ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Module requirements ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[UMS]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Additional functionality ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Testing after setup ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== What to have ready ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Is any physical item required ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Should third party be contacted ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Installation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;G Suite&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappsadminsettings.png|none|thumb|577x577px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter Admin credentials for a service account with administrator privileges to access Office 365.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Users&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &#039;&#039;&#039;“Mail Alias”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose what to use as the users mail address (login).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Disable users”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When marked the users will be disabled when they are no longer attending classes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &#039;&#039;&#039;“Delete users”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose if users are to be deleted after grace period has ended.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &#039;&#039;&#039;“Forward mail to on premise mail server”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will forward the users Office 365 mail to the primary mail address from AD (If user does not have a proxy address it will read it from the mail attribute)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Keep inactive before deleting x days”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specify a grace period where users are disabled. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Distribution lists&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Maintain lists”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mark this to create distribution groups in Office 365. The groups will be created, updated and deleted if this is specified.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Delete lists”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mark this to delete distributions groups when they are no longer active in the administrative system. Check the data export manuals too when this happens&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Delete unused lists after x days”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specify in days how long the distribution groups are to be kept alive in Office 365 before deletion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Only senders inside my organization”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With this marked only users in the domain will be able to send to distribution groups created by UMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Template security groups&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Maintain”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will create the security group entered in the field “template security group” in the destination node in the template settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Timetable&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Maintain”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mark this to create timetable blocks in Google Apps. They will be created, updated and deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Delete old”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mark this to delete old timetable blocks from calendars.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== &#039;&#039;Site&#039;&#039; ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappssite.png|none|thumb|720x720px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Automation type”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Full: Means that site maintenance will be fully automated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Remove learner method”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Deleted in AD”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users will be removed from site when they are not active in UMS anymore&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Finished on activity/course”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users will be removed when they have finished with the course. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Delete sites”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Auto delete”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sites will be delete when the last student has left the site&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Manual Delete”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sites will not be deleted by UMS. This has to be done by an administrator&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Send mail to teacher(s)”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Send mail notification to teachers when they are attached to a site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Create x days before”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose how many days before start that the sites are to be created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Delete x days after end”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose how many days after end that the sites are to be deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &#039;&#039;&#039;“Teacher rights on sites”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rights the teacher will have on the site when attached.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Learner rights on sites”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rights the student/learner will have on the site when attached.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== &#039;&#039;&#039;SQL Groups&#039;&#039;&#039; ===&lt;br /&gt;
Members of these groups will be attached to all sites created with this setting as teachers&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappssqlgroups.png|none|thumb|458x458px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Group name”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This can only be a group that is found in UMS &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You get a list of these groups by running this SQL command:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select Distinct Aktivitet As Activity From Students Order By Activity&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Activity Sites”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Do not create”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will not create any sites based on activities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“LMS has to be checked”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The field Aktivitet_LMS in the students table has to be “True”. (Look in the documentation for the specific administrative system to see how this is set)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Based on template filter”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create sites based on a filter that is specified per template.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappsactivitysites.png|none|thumb|493x493px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“All”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create all sites.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Title of the site. Changing this after a site has been created will cause it to be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Description of the site. Changing this after a site has been created will cause it to be updated.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== &#039;&#039;&#039;Search filter and criteria&#039;&#039;&#039; ===&lt;br /&gt;
This will enable you to concatenate sites that would have been created as to or more sites to be created as one site.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappssearchfilters.png|none|thumb|401x401px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Remarks”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is just for description purposes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Filter”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The SQL like filter (regular expression). If an activity matches, it will be subject to the settings below in semester roll&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Semester roll”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Use replace string with empty”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will replace a section of the site with an empty string.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                            &#039;&#039;&#039;“Start index”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Determine where to start in string to remove.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                            &#039;&#039;&#039;“Length”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How many characters will be removed from the string.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“&#039;&#039;&#039;Add activity short description to node ID&#039;&#039;&#039;“&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will add the field Kort_Betegnelse (Short Description) from the students table to the node id.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Node id is the URL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== &#039;&#039;&#039;Examples&#039;&#039;&#039; ====&lt;br /&gt;
If you have three activities named English1, English2, English3 and you only want one SharePoint site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set the settings as shown below&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappsseachfilters2.png|none|thumb|413x413px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This filter ensures that it is only applied to activities that matches this SQL sentence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Course Sites”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Course URL’s will always be created as “activity_course”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Do not create”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will not create any sites based on courses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“LMS has to be checked”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The field Skolefag_LMS in the students table has to be “True”. (Look in the documentation for the specific administrative system to see how this is set)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Based on template filter”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create sites based on a filter that is specified per template.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappsactivitysites.png|none|thumb|493x493px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“All”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create all sites.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Title of the site. Changing this after a site has been created will cause it to be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Description of the site. Changing this after a site has been created will cause it to be updated.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Search filter and criteria&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will enable you to concatenate sites that would have been created as two or more sites to be created as one site.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappsseachfilters3.png|none|thumb|427x427px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Remarks”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is just for description purposes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Course Filter”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The SQL like filter (regular expression). If an activity matches, it will be subject to the settings below in semester roll.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Semester roll”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Use replace string with empty”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will replace a section of the site with an empty string.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                            &#039;&#039;&#039;“Start index”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Determine where to start in string to remove.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Length”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How many characters will be removed from the string.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Activity Filter”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The SQL like filter (regular expression). If an activity matches, it will be subject to the settings below in semester roll&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Semester roll”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Use replace string with empty”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will replace a section of the site with an empty string.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                            &#039;&#039;&#039;“Start index”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Determine where to start in string to remove.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Length”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How many characters will be removed from the string.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== &#039;&#039;Drive&#039;&#039; ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappsdrive.png|none|thumb|720x720px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Automation type”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Full: Means that drive maintenance will be fully automated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Remove learner method”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Deleted in AD”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users will be removed from drive when they are not active in UMS anymore&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Finished on activity/course”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users will be removed when they have finished with the course. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Delete drives”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Auto delete”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Drives will be delete when the last student has left the drive&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Manual Delete”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Drives will not be deleted by UMS. This has to be done by an administrator&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Send mail to teacher(s)”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Send mail notification to teachers when they are attached to a drive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Create x days before”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose how many days before start that the drives are to be created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Delete x days after end”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose how many days after end that the drives are to be deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &#039;&#039;&#039;“Teacher rights on drives”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rights the teacher will have on the drive when attached.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Learner rights on drives”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rights the student/learner will have on the drive when attached.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“SQL Groups”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Members of these groups will be attached to all drives created with this setting as teachers&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappssqlgroups.png|none|thumb|458x458px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Group name”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This can only be a group that is found in UMS &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You get a list of these groups by running this SQL command:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select Distinct Aktivitet As Activity From Students Order By Activity&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Activity Drives”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Do not create”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will not create any sites based on activities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“LMS has to be checked”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The field Aktivitet_LMS in the students table has to be “True”. (Look in the documentation for the specific administrative system to see how this is set)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Based on template filter”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create sites based on a filter that is specified per template.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappsactivitysites.png|none|thumb|493x493px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“All”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create all drives.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Description of the drive. Changing this after a drive has been created will cause it to be updated.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Search filter and criteria&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will enable you to concatenate drives that would have been created as to or more drives to be created as one drive.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappssearchfilters.png|none|thumb|401x401px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Remarks”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is just for description purposes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Filter”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The SQL like filter (regular expression). If an activity matches, it will be subject to the settings below in semester roll&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Semester roll”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Use replace string with empty”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will replace a section of the drive with an empty string.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                            &#039;&#039;&#039;“Start index”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Determine where to start in string to remove.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                            &#039;&#039;&#039;“Length”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How many characters will be removed from the string.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“&#039;&#039;&#039;Add activity short description to node ID&#039;&#039;&#039;“&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will add the field Kort_Betegnelse (Short Description) from the students table to the node id.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Node id is the URL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Examples&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have three activities named English1, English2, English3 and you only want one SharePoint drive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set the settings as shown below&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappsseachfilters2.png|none|thumb|413x413px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This filter ensures that it is only applied to activities that matches this SQL sentence. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Course Drives”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Course URL’s will always be created as “activity_course”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Do not create”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will not create any drives based on courses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“LMS has to be checked”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The field Skolefag_LMS in the students table has to be “True”. (Look in the documentation for the specific administrative system to see how this is set)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Based on template filter”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create drives based on a filter that is specified per template.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappsactivitysites.png|none|thumb|493x493px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“All”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create all drives.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Description of the drive. Changing this after a drive has been created will cause it to be updated.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Search filter and criteria&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will enable you to concatenate drives that would have been created as two or more drives to be created as one drive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappsseachfilters3.png|none|thumb|427x427px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Remarks”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is just for description purposes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Course Filter”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The SQL like filter (regular expression). If an activity matches, it will be subject to the settings below in semester roll.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Semester roll”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Use replace string with empty”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will replace a section of the drive with an empty string.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                            &#039;&#039;&#039;“Start index”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Determine where to start in string to remove.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Length”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How many characters will be removed from the string.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Activity Filter”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The SQL like filter (regular expression). If an activity matches, it will be subject to the settings below in semester roll&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Semester roll”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Use replace string with empty”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will replace a section of the drive with an empty string.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                            &#039;&#039;&#039;“Start index”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Determine where to start in string to remove.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Length”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How many characters will be removed from the string.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  === &#039;&#039;Classroom&#039;&#039; ===&lt;br /&gt;
There can only be a maximum of 990 classrooms in total in one organization. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Google designed features (Not UMS)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a teacher leaves the school, the material that he has put into classrooms will be deleted as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a user has too many classrooms it will be very slow for this user.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappsclassroomsettings.png|none|thumb|720x720px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Automation type”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Full: Means that classroom maintenance will be fully automated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Remove learner method”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Deleted in AD”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users will be removed from classroom when they are not active in UMS anymore&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Finished on activity/course”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users will be removed when they have finished with the course.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Delete classrooms”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Auto delete”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Classrooms will be delete when the last student has left the classroom&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Manual Delete”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Classrooms will not be deleted by UMS. This has to be done by an administrator&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Send mail to teacher(s)”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Send mail notification to teachers when they are attached to a classroom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Create x days before”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose how many days before start that the classroom s are to be created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Delete x days after end”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose how many days after end that the classroom s are to be deleted.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“SQL Groups”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Members of these groups will be attached to all classrooms created with this setting as teachers&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappssqlgroups.png|link=http://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php/File:Googleappssqlgroups.png|none|thumb|458x458px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Group name”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This can only be a group that is found in UMS &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You get a list of these groups by running this SQL command:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select Distinct Aktivitet As Activity From Students Order By Activity&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Activity Classroomss”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Do not create”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will not create any sites based on activities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“LMS has to be checked”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The field Aktivitet_LMS in the students table has to be “True”. (Look in the documentation for the specific administrative system to see how this is set)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Based on template filter”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create sites based on a filter that is specified per template.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappsactivitysites.png|link=http://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php/File:Googleappsactivitysites.png|none|thumb|493x493px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“All”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create all classrooms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Description of the classroom. Changing this after a classroom has been created will cause it to be updated.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Search filter and criteria&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will enable you to concatenate classrooms that would have been created as to or more classrooms to be created as one classroom.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappssearchfilters.png|link=http://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php/File:Googleappssearchfilters.png|none|thumb|401x401px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Remarks”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is just for description purposes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Filter”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The SQL like filter (regular expression). If an activity matches, it will be subject to the settings below in semester roll&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Semester roll”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Use replace string with empty”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will replace a section of the classroom with an empty string.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                            &#039;&#039;&#039;“Start index”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Determine where to start in string to remove.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                            &#039;&#039;&#039;“Length”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How many characters will be removed from the string.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“&#039;&#039;&#039;Add activity short description to node ID&#039;&#039;&#039;“&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will add the field Kort_Betegnelse (Short Description) from the students table to the node id.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Node id is the URL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Examples&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have three activities named English1, English2, English3 and you only want one SharePoint classroom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set the settings as shown below&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappsseachfilters2.png|link=http://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php/File:Googleappsseachfilters2.png|none|thumb|413x413px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This filter ensures that it is only applied to activities that matches this SQL sentence. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Course Classrooms”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Course URL’s will always be created as “activity course”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Do not create”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will not create any classrooms based on courses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“LMS has to be checked”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The field Skolefag_LMS in the students table has to be “True”. (Look in the documentation for the specific administrative system to see how this is set)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Based on template filter”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create classrooms based on a filter that is specified per template.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappsactivitysites.png|link=http://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php/File:Googleappsactivitysites.png|none|thumb|493x493px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“All”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create all classrooms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Description of the classroom. Changing this after a classroom has been created will cause it to be updated.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Search filter and criteria&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will enable you to concatenate classrooms that would have been created as two or more classrooms to be created as one classroom.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappsseachfilters3.png|link=http://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php/File:Googleappsseachfilters3.png|none|thumb|427x427px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Remarks”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is just for description purposes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Course Filter”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The SQL like filter (regular expression). If an activity matches, it will be subject to the settings below in semester roll.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Semester roll”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Use replace string with empty”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will replace a section of the classroom with an empty string.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                            &#039;&#039;&#039;“Start index”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Determine where to start in string to remove.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Length”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How many characters will be removed from the string.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Activity Filter”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The SQL like filter (regular expression). If an activity matches, it will be subject to the settings below in semester roll&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Semester roll”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Use replace string with empty”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will replace a section of the classroom with an empty string.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                                            &#039;&#039;&#039;“Start index”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Determine where to start in string to remove.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Length”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How many characters will be removed from the string.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  === &#039;&#039;&#039;Organization Settings&#039;&#039;&#039; ===&lt;br /&gt;
When creating a user for Google refer to this PDF &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
http://downloads.inlogic.dk/manualer/GoogleAppsSync.pdf&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappsorganizationsettings.png|none|thumb|378x378px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Description”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add a description to be able to identify the account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Admin login”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mail address of an administrative user&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &#039;&#039;&#039;“Password”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Password for the admin login specified&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Domain”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The google domain that is used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Client ID”, “Client Secret”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is obtained when following the instructions in the PDF document&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Refresh token”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will be generated the first time google synchronization is started. If this is reset UMS will asked for it again when the next synchronization is run.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Timetable Users”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This can be used when creating timetable blocks. Look in timetable documentation for this feature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Template Settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you specify which templates are synchronized with Google and how.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappstemplateeditor.png|none|thumb|687x687px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Setting”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the setting described above  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Organization setting”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specify where the users are created&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappsaosettings.png|none|thumb|422x422px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Path&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is where all users is placed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Use this path when below 13 years of age&#039;&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is where users that are under 13 years is placed. If this is not specified everyone will be placed under the path setting. (This is helpful when it comes to Google+)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;OU Description&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The description that is set on the OU when it is created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Site settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings used when creating sites from this template &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappssitesettings.png|none|thumb|422x422px]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Site category&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A list of categories added to the site when creating it separated with a ;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A category called UMS will be added aswell. (This cannot be change)  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“SQL Groups”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Members of these groups will be attached to all sites created with this setting as teachers&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappssqlgroups.png|link=http://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php/File:Googleappssqlgroups.png|none|thumb|458x458px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Group name”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This can only be a group that is found in UMS &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You get a list of these groups by running this SQL command:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select Distinct Aktivitet As Activity From Students Order By Activity&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Drive settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings used when creating drives from this template &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappsdrivesettings.png|none|thumb|429x429px]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Path”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The path where the drives are created&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Create user specific subfolder&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create a folder for each student that is attached to each drive&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Suffix&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A text string that is appended to the folder name&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Create subfolder (Teacher Read/Write - Student Read)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A folder where teachers can upload data that students can only read&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Suffix&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A text string that is appended to the folder name&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Create subfolder (Teacher Read/Write - Student Read/Write)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A folder where teachers and students can share data both with read/write&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Suffix&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A text string that is appended to the folder name&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappsstudents.png|none|thumb|279x279px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“SQL Groups”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Members of these groups will be attached to all sites created with this setting as teachers&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappssqlgroups.png|link=http://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php/File:Googleappssqlgroups.png|none|thumb|458x458px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Group name”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This can only be a group that is found in UMS &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You get a list of these groups by running this SQL command:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select Distinct Aktivitet As Activity From Students Order By Activity&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Classroom settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Settings used when creating classrooms from this template  &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappsclassroomsettings2.png|none|thumb]]  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“SQL Groups”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Members of these groups will be attached to all sites created with this setting as teachers&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googleappssqlgroups.png|link=http://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php/File:Googleappssqlgroups.png|none|thumb|458x458px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;“Group name”&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This can only be a group that is found in UMS &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You get a list of these groups by running this SQL command:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select Distinct Aktivitet As Activity From Students Order By Activity&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Installation G Suite Sync ==&lt;br /&gt;
Steps to make UMS sync work with G Suite.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Log on &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;https://console.developers.google.com&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; with your Google Admin account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create a project&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googlesyncproject2.png|none|thumb|594x594px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When created choose project and click the newly created project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose “Enable and manage APIs”. Enable these APIs&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googlesyncenableapi.png|none|thumb|463x463px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click credentials&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And choose “OAuth client ID”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose settings as show on below image. Name can be changed.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googlesyncoauth.png|none|thumb|499x499px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then choose “Create”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Which creates an OAuth 2.0 client ID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter Client ID and Client Secret into UMS&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googlesyncoauth2.png|none|thumb|513x513px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go back to “Overview” and choose “Enabled APIs”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on each API you added and choose Quota &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googlesyncenableapi2.png|none|thumb|517x517px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set the number as high as you can without “apply for higher quota”&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googlesyncapplyhighquota.png|none|thumb|439x439px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And you are done with this site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now Log on https://admin.google.com with your Google Admin account&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Find “Other Google Services” - can be located under “More Controls” or under APPS aplaced at page bottom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click “add services” upper right corner&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then click “Add it now” on “Groups for Business”&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googlesyncservices.png|none|thumb|495x495px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Back to start and choose “Security”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose “API reference” and check “Enable API access”&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googlesyncsecurity.png|none|thumb|439x439px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to the UMS “usermanagement folder” and run “GoogleApps_Sync.exe” manually. And “Accept” the following&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googlesyncaccept.png|none|thumb|578x578px]]&lt;br /&gt;
If you get a “This page can’t be displayed”&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Googlesyncpagenotfound.png|none|thumb|315x315px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not be alarmed. The job has been activated and you can check your GoogleApps_Sync.log to confirm that the job has completed running.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Technical settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== FAQ ==&lt;br /&gt;
Why do I not get the drive/site created?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.      Activity&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
a.     Is there a user on the activity with a primary template that has an office 365 setting attached&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
b.     Is the flag Aktivitet_LMS = True&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.     Course&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
a.     Is there a user on the course with a primary template that has an office 365 setting attached&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
b.     Is the flag Skolefag_LMS = True&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmh</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=Inlogicmodem&amp;diff=1448</id>
		<title>Inlogicmodem</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=Inlogicmodem&amp;diff=1448"/>
		<updated>2018-07-05T09:13:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmh: Redirected page to InLogic SMS Gateway&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#REDIRECT [[inLogic SMS Gateway]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Important ==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Certificate is required for use of Modem&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To be able to send SMS the inLogicModem requires GSM modems with USB interface. We recommend &amp;quot;HUAWEI LTE USB Stick Model: E3372&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Network Port Openings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== TCP port openings from server to modem. ====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Port&lt;br /&gt;
!Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|22&lt;br /&gt;
|SSH access&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|80&lt;br /&gt;
|HTTP access&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|443&lt;br /&gt;
|HTTPS access&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3306&lt;br /&gt;
|Database access&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== TCP port openings from modem to server. ====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Port&lt;br /&gt;
!Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|80&lt;br /&gt;
|HTTP access&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|443&lt;br /&gt;
|HTTPS access&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Prepare Modem ==&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
![[File:20180516 104258-50%.jpg|none|thumb|800x800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
!Plug-in Modems&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:20180516 104358-50%.jpg|none|thumb|800x800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Plug-in Ethernet cable&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Plug-in power cable&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== System Login ==&lt;br /&gt;
Once modem is [[#Prepare Modem|prepared]] and booted, browse to &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://192.168.1.2&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; and click login in upper right corner.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Main Login button.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Login box will popup, and here login with USERNAME: admin and PASSWORD: admin&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Login.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Main Page ==&lt;br /&gt;
After login the system info page appears.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Shows status of the modem.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Main.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Click the [[File:Foxbox menu button.png|frameless|23x23px]] to open menu&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Main with menu.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Network Configuration ==&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Network Config” in menu&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Change IP settings and press “Save Configuration”, [[Inlogicmodem#Reboot|Reboot]] modem on “inLogic Modem Settings” page.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Network Config.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modem Settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Frontend and Hostname Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Hostname ====&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Modem Settings” in the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set Modem Hostname as FQDN.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Scroll down and Click “Save” and the modem will restart.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings Hostname.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Frontend ====&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Modem Settings” in menu&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Change FrontEnd Address to fit your configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Scroll down and Click “Save”&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings Frontend.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Certificate(https) Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Modem Settings” in menu&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;Choose File&amp;quot; and choose pfx certificate from your harddrive/USB stick/other media.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter pfx certificate password in &amp;quot;Certificate Password&amp;quot; box and click &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings Certificate.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== User Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
In the menu click “Modem Settings” and scroll down to “User Settings”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change default admin user password (default “admin”), write new password in Password box just below admin username.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change default sendsms user password (default “sendsms”), write new password in Password box just below sendsms username.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Save” to confirm password change.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings User.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Control Panel ==&lt;br /&gt;
In the menu click &amp;quot;Control Panel&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use Control Panel to see State of SMS Engine, turn on/off SMS Engine.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Control Panel.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SMS ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inbox ===&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Inbox” in menu to see a log of incoming messages.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Inbox.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Outbox ===&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Outbox” in menu to see a log of outgoing messages.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Outbox.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Failed ===&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Failed” in menu to see a log of failed messages.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Failed.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Write New ===&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Write New” in menu to see a log of outgoing messages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;background-color: #FFFF00&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Choose what modem to send from or leave as is to choose first free modem.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;background-color: #00FF00&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Insert mobile phone number to send to. (international prefix is mandatory)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;background-color: #0000FF; color: #FFFFFF&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Write text to send.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Send” to continue.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Write New guide.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Time Zone Settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
In the menu click &amp;quot;Time Zone Settings&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Time zone and NTP server settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For External NTP servers check Enable External NTP (default) and choose External NTP Region (Default Europe)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Internal NTP, uncheck Enable External NTP and write comma separated list of NTP servers in Internal NTP textbox.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To set your Time Zone, click Time Zone dropdown and choose your zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click Save to change configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Time Zone Settings.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tools ==&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;Modem Settings&amp;quot; in menu and go to bottom of page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Shell ===&lt;br /&gt;
In browser shell to change advanced settings (&amp;lt;u style=&amp;quot;color:red;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;use with caution&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;)&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings Shell.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Reboot ===&lt;br /&gt;
Reboot modem.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings Reboot.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Root Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
Change of root password requires login to shell. (default root password is &amp;quot;odroid&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Login to shell, run passwd command and follow instructions on screen.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings Root.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
__FORCETOC__&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmh</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=InLogic_SMS_Gateway&amp;diff=1447</id>
		<title>InLogic SMS Gateway</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=InLogic_SMS_Gateway&amp;diff=1447"/>
		<updated>2018-07-05T09:11:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmh: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Important ==&lt;br /&gt;
To be able to send SMS, the inLogic SMS Gateway requires GSM modems with USB interface. We recommend &amp;quot;HUAWEI LTE USB Stick Model: E3372&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hardware Compatibility List ===&lt;br /&gt;
[http://consumer.huawei.com/en/mobile-broadband/e3531/specs/ Huawei E3531]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://consumer.huawei.com/en/mobile-broadband/e3372/ Huawei E3372] (inLogic&#039;s choice)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://consumer.huawei.com/lk/mobile-broadband/dongles/features/e3131-lk.htm Huawei E3131i]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.tp-link.com/la/products/details/cat-5090_MA260.html TP-Link MA260]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Network Port Openings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== TCP port openings from server to gateway. ====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Port&lt;br /&gt;
!Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|22&lt;br /&gt;
|SSH access&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|80&lt;br /&gt;
|HTTP access&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|443&lt;br /&gt;
|HTTPS access&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3306&lt;br /&gt;
|Database access&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== TCP port openings from gateway to server. ====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Port&lt;br /&gt;
!Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|80&lt;br /&gt;
|HTTP access&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|443&lt;br /&gt;
|HTTPS access&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Prepare Modem ==&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
![[File:20180516 104258-50%.jpg|none|thumb|800x800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
!Plug-in Modems&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:20180516 104358-50%.jpg|none|thumb|800x800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Plug-in Ethernet cable&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Plug-in power cable&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== System Login ==&lt;br /&gt;
Once the gateway is [[#Prepare Modem|prepared]] and booted, open a browser and go to http://192.168.1.2. Login through the &#039;Login&#039; button in the top right corner. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Main Login button.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
You will now see a login box where you can log in with with USERNAME: admin and PASSWORD: admin.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Login.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Main Page ==&lt;br /&gt;
After logging in, the system info page appears. This page shows the gateway&#039;s status.[[File:Main.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
To open the menu, click on this icon:  [[File:Foxbox menu button.png|frameless|23x23px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Main with menu.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Network Configuration ==&lt;br /&gt;
Click on menu tab &#039;Network config&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Change the IP settings and press &#039;Save Configuration&#039;. When you have saved your settings, [[InLogic SMS Gateway#Reboot|Reboot]] the gateway as instructed below in &#039;Modem Settings&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Network Config.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modem Settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hostname and Frontend Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Hostname ====&lt;br /&gt;
Open the menu and go to &#039;Modem Settings&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set &#039;Modem Hostname&#039; as FQDN and save your changes. Your modem will now restart.[[File:Modem Settings Hostname.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Frontend ====&lt;br /&gt;
Open the menu and go to &#039;Modem Settings&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Change &#039;FrontEnd Address&#039; to fit your configuration and save your settings.[[File:Modem Settings Frontend.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Certificate Settings (https) ===&lt;br /&gt;
Open the menu and go to &#039;Modem Settings&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;Choose File&#039; and choose a .pfx certificate from your computer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Entera a .pfx certificate password in the &#039;Certificate Password&#039; field and click &#039;Save&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings Certificate.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== User Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
Open the menu and go to &#039;Modem Settings&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default admin user password is &#039;admin&#039;. To change the default admin user password, write the new password in the &#039;Password&#039; field just below the &#039;Username&#039; field admin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default sendsms user password is &#039;sendsms&#039;. To change the default sendsms user password, write the new password in the &#039;Password&#039; field just below the &#039;Username&#039; field sendsms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;Save&#039; to confirm the password change.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings User.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Control Panel ==&lt;br /&gt;
Open the menu and go to &#039;Control Panel&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here, you can see staus, as well as turn on and off, the SMS Engine.[[File:Control Panel.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SMS ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inbox ===&lt;br /&gt;
To see a log for incoming messages, open the menu and go to &#039;Inbox&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Inbox.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Outbox ===&lt;br /&gt;
To see a log for outgoing messages, open the menu and go to &#039;Outbox&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Outbox.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Failed ===&lt;br /&gt;
To see a log for failed messages, open the menu and go to &#039;Failed&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Failed.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Write New ===&lt;br /&gt;
To write a new SMS, open the menu and go to &#039;Write New&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose the modem you wish to send your message from in the drop down menu &#039;Outgoing channel&#039;. If left blank, the system will choose the first available modem.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the phone number you wish to send your SMS to in the &#039;To&#039; field. Pleas note that international prefix is mandatory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Write your message in the &#039;Message&#039; field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you have finished, click &#039;Send&#039;.[[File:Write New guide.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Time Zone Settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
Open the menu and go to &#039;Time Zone Settings&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The NTP &amp;amp; Time Zone Settings is by default set to enable external NTP. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For internal NTP, uncheck the &#039;Enable External NTP&#039; box and write a list of NTP servers separated by comma, in the &#039;Internal NTP&#039; field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change your time zone, choose a time zone from the &#039;Time Zone&#039; drop down menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;Save&#039; to change your settings.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Time Zone Settings.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tools ==&lt;br /&gt;
Open the menu and go to &#039;Modem Settings&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Shell ===&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;in browser&#039; shell to change advanced settings. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u style=&amp;quot;color:red;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Use with caution!&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; Please note that if you make any changes without consulting us first, support will be charged accordingly with our hourly rate.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings Shell.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Root Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
Change of root password requires login to shell. Default root password is &#039;odroid&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Login to shell, run password command and follow the instructions on screen.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings Root.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
__FORCETOC__&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmh</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=Inlogicmodem&amp;diff=1446</id>
		<title>Inlogicmodem</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=Inlogicmodem&amp;diff=1446"/>
		<updated>2018-07-05T09:09:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmh: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;#&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;REDIRECT [[InLogic SMS Gateway]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Important ==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Certificate is required for use of Modem&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To be able to send SMS the inLogicModem requires GSM modems with USB interface. We recommend &amp;quot;HUAWEI LTE USB Stick Model: E3372&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Network Port Openings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== TCP port openings from server to modem. ====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Port&lt;br /&gt;
!Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|22&lt;br /&gt;
|SSH access&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|80&lt;br /&gt;
|HTTP access&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|443&lt;br /&gt;
|HTTPS access&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3306&lt;br /&gt;
|Database access&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== TCP port openings from modem to server. ====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Port&lt;br /&gt;
!Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|80&lt;br /&gt;
|HTTP access&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|443&lt;br /&gt;
|HTTPS access&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Prepare Modem ==&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
![[File:20180516 104258-50%.jpg|none|thumb|800x800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
!Plug-in Modems&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:20180516 104358-50%.jpg|none|thumb|800x800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Plug-in Ethernet cable&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Plug-in power cable&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== System Login ==&lt;br /&gt;
Once modem is [[#Prepare Modem|prepared]] and booted, browse to &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://192.168.1.2&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; and click login in upper right corner.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Main Login button.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Login box will popup, and here login with USERNAME: admin and PASSWORD: admin&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Login.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Main Page ==&lt;br /&gt;
After login the system info page appears.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Shows status of the modem.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Main.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Click the [[File:Foxbox menu button.png|frameless|23x23px]] to open menu&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Main with menu.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Network Configuration ==&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Network Config” in menu&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Change IP settings and press “Save Configuration”, [[Inlogicmodem#Reboot|Reboot]] modem on “inLogic Modem Settings” page.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Network Config.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modem Settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Frontend and Hostname Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Hostname ====&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Modem Settings” in the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set Modem Hostname as FQDN.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Scroll down and Click “Save” and the modem will restart.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings Hostname.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Frontend ====&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Modem Settings” in menu&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Change FrontEnd Address to fit your configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Scroll down and Click “Save”&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings Frontend.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Certificate(https) Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Modem Settings” in menu&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;Choose File&amp;quot; and choose pfx certificate from your harddrive/USB stick/other media.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter pfx certificate password in &amp;quot;Certificate Password&amp;quot; box and click &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings Certificate.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== User Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
In the menu click “Modem Settings” and scroll down to “User Settings”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change default admin user password (default “admin”), write new password in Password box just below admin username.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change default sendsms user password (default “sendsms”), write new password in Password box just below sendsms username.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Save” to confirm password change.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings User.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Control Panel ==&lt;br /&gt;
In the menu click &amp;quot;Control Panel&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use Control Panel to see State of SMS Engine, turn on/off SMS Engine.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Control Panel.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SMS ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inbox ===&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Inbox” in menu to see a log of incoming messages.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Inbox.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Outbox ===&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Outbox” in menu to see a log of outgoing messages.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Outbox.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Failed ===&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Failed” in menu to see a log of failed messages.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Failed.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Write New ===&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Write New” in menu to see a log of outgoing messages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;background-color: #FFFF00&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Choose what modem to send from or leave as is to choose first free modem.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;background-color: #00FF00&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Insert mobile phone number to send to. (international prefix is mandatory)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;background-color: #0000FF; color: #FFFFFF&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Write text to send.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Send” to continue.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Write New guide.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Time Zone Settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
In the menu click &amp;quot;Time Zone Settings&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Time zone and NTP server settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For External NTP servers check Enable External NTP (default) and choose External NTP Region (Default Europe)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Internal NTP, uncheck Enable External NTP and write comma separated list of NTP servers in Internal NTP textbox.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To set your Time Zone, click Time Zone dropdown and choose your zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click Save to change configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Time Zone Settings.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tools ==&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;Modem Settings&amp;quot; in menu and go to bottom of page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Shell ===&lt;br /&gt;
In browser shell to change advanced settings (&amp;lt;u style=&amp;quot;color:red;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;use with caution&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;)&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings Shell.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Reboot ===&lt;br /&gt;
Reboot modem.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings Reboot.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Root Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
Change of root password requires login to shell. (default root password is &amp;quot;odroid&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Login to shell, run passwd command and follow instructions on screen.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings Root.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
__FORCETOC__&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmh</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=Inlogicmodem&amp;diff=1445</id>
		<title>Inlogicmodem</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=Inlogicmodem&amp;diff=1445"/>
		<updated>2018-07-05T09:07:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmh: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#REDIRECT [[[[inLogic SMS Gateway]]]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Important ==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Certificate is required for use of Modem&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To be able to send SMS the inLogicModem requires GSM modems with USB interface. We recommend &amp;quot;HUAWEI LTE USB Stick Model: E3372&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Network Port Openings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== TCP port openings from server to modem. ====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Port&lt;br /&gt;
!Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|22&lt;br /&gt;
|SSH access&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|80&lt;br /&gt;
|HTTP access&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|443&lt;br /&gt;
|HTTPS access&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3306&lt;br /&gt;
|Database access&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== TCP port openings from modem to server. ====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Port&lt;br /&gt;
!Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|80&lt;br /&gt;
|HTTP access&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|443&lt;br /&gt;
|HTTPS access&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Prepare Modem ==&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
![[File:20180516 104258-50%.jpg|none|thumb|800x800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
!Plug-in Modems&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:20180516 104358-50%.jpg|none|thumb|800x800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Plug-in Ethernet cable&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Plug-in power cable&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== System Login ==&lt;br /&gt;
Once modem is [[#Prepare Modem|prepared]] and booted, browse to &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://192.168.1.2&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; and click login in upper right corner.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Main Login button.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Login box will popup, and here login with USERNAME: admin and PASSWORD: admin&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Login.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Main Page ==&lt;br /&gt;
After login the system info page appears.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Shows status of the modem.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Main.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Click the [[File:Foxbox menu button.png|frameless|23x23px]] to open menu&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Main with menu.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Network Configuration ==&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Network Config” in menu&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Change IP settings and press “Save Configuration”, [[Inlogicmodem#Reboot|Reboot]] modem on “inLogic Modem Settings” page.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Network Config.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modem Settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Frontend and Hostname Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Hostname ====&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Modem Settings” in the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set Modem Hostname as FQDN.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Scroll down and Click “Save” and the modem will restart.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings Hostname.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Frontend ====&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Modem Settings” in menu&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Change FrontEnd Address to fit your configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Scroll down and Click “Save”&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings Frontend.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Certificate(https) Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Modem Settings” in menu&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;Choose File&amp;quot; and choose pfx certificate from your harddrive/USB stick/other media.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter pfx certificate password in &amp;quot;Certificate Password&amp;quot; box and click &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings Certificate.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== User Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
In the menu click “Modem Settings” and scroll down to “User Settings”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change default admin user password (default “admin”), write new password in Password box just below admin username.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change default sendsms user password (default “sendsms”), write new password in Password box just below sendsms username.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Save” to confirm password change.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings User.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Control Panel ==&lt;br /&gt;
In the menu click &amp;quot;Control Panel&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use Control Panel to see State of SMS Engine, turn on/off SMS Engine.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Control Panel.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SMS ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inbox ===&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Inbox” in menu to see a log of incoming messages.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Inbox.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Outbox ===&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Outbox” in menu to see a log of outgoing messages.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Outbox.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Failed ===&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Failed” in menu to see a log of failed messages.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Failed.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Write New ===&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Write New” in menu to see a log of outgoing messages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;background-color: #FFFF00&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Choose what modem to send from or leave as is to choose first free modem.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;background-color: #00FF00&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Insert mobile phone number to send to. (international prefix is mandatory)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;background-color: #0000FF; color: #FFFFFF&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Write text to send.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Send” to continue.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Write New guide.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Time Zone Settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
In the menu click &amp;quot;Time Zone Settings&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Time zone and NTP server settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For External NTP servers check Enable External NTP (default) and choose External NTP Region (Default Europe)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Internal NTP, uncheck Enable External NTP and write comma separated list of NTP servers in Internal NTP textbox.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To set your Time Zone, click Time Zone dropdown and choose your zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click Save to change configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Time Zone Settings.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tools ==&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;Modem Settings&amp;quot; in menu and go to bottom of page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Shell ===&lt;br /&gt;
In browser shell to change advanced settings (&amp;lt;u style=&amp;quot;color:red;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;use with caution&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;)&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings Shell.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Reboot ===&lt;br /&gt;
Reboot modem.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings Reboot.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Root Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
Change of root password requires login to shell. (default root password is &amp;quot;odroid&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Login to shell, run passwd command and follow instructions on screen.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings Root.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
__FORCETOC__&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmh</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=Inlogicmodem&amp;diff=1444</id>
		<title>Inlogicmodem</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=Inlogicmodem&amp;diff=1444"/>
		<updated>2018-07-05T09:04:35Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmh: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt; #REDIRECT [[inLogic SMS Gateway]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Important ==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Certificate is required for use of Modem&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To be able to send SMS the inLogicModem requires GSM modems with USB interface. We recommend &amp;quot;HUAWEI LTE USB Stick Model: E3372&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Network Port Openings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== TCP port openings from server to modem. ====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Port&lt;br /&gt;
!Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|22&lt;br /&gt;
|SSH access&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|80&lt;br /&gt;
|HTTP access&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|443&lt;br /&gt;
|HTTPS access&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3306&lt;br /&gt;
|Database access&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== TCP port openings from modem to server. ====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Port&lt;br /&gt;
!Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|80&lt;br /&gt;
|HTTP access&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|443&lt;br /&gt;
|HTTPS access&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Prepare Modem ==&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
![[File:20180516 104258-50%.jpg|none|thumb|800x800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
!Plug-in Modems&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:20180516 104358-50%.jpg|none|thumb|800x800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Plug-in Ethernet cable&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Plug-in power cable&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== System Login ==&lt;br /&gt;
Once modem is [[#Prepare Modem|prepared]] and booted, browse to &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://192.168.1.2&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; and click login in upper right corner.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Main Login button.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Login box will popup, and here login with USERNAME: admin and PASSWORD: admin&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Login.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Main Page ==&lt;br /&gt;
After login the system info page appears.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Shows status of the modem.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Main.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Click the [[File:Foxbox menu button.png|frameless|23x23px]] to open menu&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Main with menu.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Network Configuration ==&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Network Config” in menu&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Change IP settings and press “Save Configuration”, [[Inlogicmodem#Reboot|Reboot]] modem on “inLogic Modem Settings” page.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Network Config.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modem Settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Frontend and Hostname Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Hostname ====&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Modem Settings” in the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set Modem Hostname as FQDN.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Scroll down and Click “Save” and the modem will restart.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings Hostname.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Frontend ====&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Modem Settings” in menu&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Change FrontEnd Address to fit your configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Scroll down and Click “Save”&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings Frontend.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Certificate(https) Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Modem Settings” in menu&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;Choose File&amp;quot; and choose pfx certificate from your harddrive/USB stick/other media.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter pfx certificate password in &amp;quot;Certificate Password&amp;quot; box and click &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings Certificate.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== User Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
In the menu click “Modem Settings” and scroll down to “User Settings”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change default admin user password (default “admin”), write new password in Password box just below admin username.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change default sendsms user password (default “sendsms”), write new password in Password box just below sendsms username.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Save” to confirm password change.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings User.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Control Panel ==&lt;br /&gt;
In the menu click &amp;quot;Control Panel&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use Control Panel to see State of SMS Engine, turn on/off SMS Engine.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Control Panel.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SMS ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inbox ===&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Inbox” in menu to see a log of incoming messages.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Inbox.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Outbox ===&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Outbox” in menu to see a log of outgoing messages.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Outbox.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Failed ===&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Failed” in menu to see a log of failed messages.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Failed.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Write New ===&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Write New” in menu to see a log of outgoing messages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;background-color: #FFFF00&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Choose what modem to send from or leave as is to choose first free modem.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;background-color: #00FF00&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Insert mobile phone number to send to. (international prefix is mandatory)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;background-color: #0000FF; color: #FFFFFF&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Write text to send.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Send” to continue.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Write New guide.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Time Zone Settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
In the menu click &amp;quot;Time Zone Settings&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Time zone and NTP server settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For External NTP servers check Enable External NTP (default) and choose External NTP Region (Default Europe)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Internal NTP, uncheck Enable External NTP and write comma separated list of NTP servers in Internal NTP textbox.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To set your Time Zone, click Time Zone dropdown and choose your zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click Save to change configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Time Zone Settings.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tools ==&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;Modem Settings&amp;quot; in menu and go to bottom of page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Shell ===&lt;br /&gt;
In browser shell to change advanced settings (&amp;lt;u style=&amp;quot;color:red;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;use with caution&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;)&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings Shell.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Reboot ===&lt;br /&gt;
Reboot modem.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings Reboot.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Root Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
Change of root password requires login to shell. (default root password is &amp;quot;odroid&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Login to shell, run passwd command and follow instructions on screen.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings Root.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
__FORCETOC__&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmh</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=Inlogicmodem&amp;diff=1443</id>
		<title>Inlogicmodem</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=Inlogicmodem&amp;diff=1443"/>
		<updated>2018-07-05T09:04:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmh: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt; #REDIRECT [[inLogic SMS Gateway]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Important ==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Certificate is required for use of Modem&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To be able to send SMS the inLogicModem requires GSM modems with USB interface. We recommend &amp;quot;HUAWEI LTE USB Stick Model: E3372&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Network Port Openings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== TCP port openings from server to modem. ====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Port&lt;br /&gt;
!Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|22&lt;br /&gt;
|SSH access&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|80&lt;br /&gt;
|HTTP access&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|443&lt;br /&gt;
|HTTPS access&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3306&lt;br /&gt;
|Database access&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== TCP port openings from modem to server. ====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Port&lt;br /&gt;
!Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|80&lt;br /&gt;
|HTTP access&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|443&lt;br /&gt;
|HTTPS access&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Prepare Modem ==&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
![[File:20180516 104258-50%.jpg|none|thumb|800x800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
!Plug-in Modems&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:20180516 104358-50%.jpg|none|thumb|800x800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Plug-in Ethernet cable&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Plug-in power cable&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== System Login ==&lt;br /&gt;
Once modem is [[#Prepare Modem|prepared]] and booted, browse to &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://192.168.1.2&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; and click login in upper right corner.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Main Login button.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Login box will popup, and here login with USERNAME: admin and PASSWORD: admin&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Login.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Main Page ==&lt;br /&gt;
After login the system info page appears.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Shows status of the modem.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Main.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Click the [[File:Foxbox menu button.png|frameless|23x23px]] to open menu&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Main with menu.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Network Configuration ==&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Network Config” in menu&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Change IP settings and press “Save Configuration”, [[Inlogicmodem#Reboot|Reboot]] modem on “inLogic Modem Settings” page.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Network Config.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modem Settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Frontend and Hostname Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Hostname ====&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Modem Settings” in the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set Modem Hostname as FQDN.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Scroll down and Click “Save” and the modem will restart.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings Hostname.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Frontend ====&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Modem Settings” in menu&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Change FrontEnd Address to fit your configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Scroll down and Click “Save”&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings Frontend.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Certificate(https) Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Modem Settings” in menu&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;Choose File&amp;quot; and choose pfx certificate from your harddrive/USB stick/other media.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter pfx certificate password in &amp;quot;Certificate Password&amp;quot; box and click &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings Certificate.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== User Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
In the menu click “Modem Settings” and scroll down to “User Settings”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change default admin user password (default “admin”), write new password in Password box just below admin username.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change default sendsms user password (default “sendsms”), write new password in Password box just below sendsms username.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Save” to confirm password change.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings User.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Control Panel ==&lt;br /&gt;
In the menu click &amp;quot;Control Panel&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use Control Panel to see State of SMS Engine, turn on/off SMS Engine.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Control Panel.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SMS ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inbox ===&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Inbox” in menu to see a log of incoming messages.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Inbox.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Outbox ===&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Outbox” in menu to see a log of outgoing messages.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Outbox.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Failed ===&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Failed” in menu to see a log of failed messages.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Failed.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Write New ===&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Write New” in menu to see a log of outgoing messages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;background-color: #FFFF00&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Choose what modem to send from or leave as is to choose first free modem.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;background-color: #00FF00&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Insert mobile phone number to send to. (international prefix is mandatory)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;background-color: #0000FF; color: #FFFFFF&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Write text to send.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Send” to continue.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Write New guide.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Time Zone Settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
In the menu click &amp;quot;Time Zone Settings&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Time zone and NTP server settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For External NTP servers check Enable External NTP (default) and choose External NTP Region (Default Europe)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Internal NTP, uncheck Enable External NTP and write comma separated list of NTP servers in Internal NTP textbox.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To set your Time Zone, click Time Zone dropdown and choose your zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click Save to change configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Time Zone Settings.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tools ==&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;Modem Settings&amp;quot; in menu and go to bottom of page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Shell ===&lt;br /&gt;
In browser shell to change advanced settings (&amp;lt;u style=&amp;quot;color:red;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;use with caution&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;)&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings Shell.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Reboot ===&lt;br /&gt;
Reboot modem.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings Reboot.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Root Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
Change of root password requires login to shell. (default root password is &amp;quot;odroid&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Login to shell, run passwd command and follow instructions on screen.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings Root.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
__FORCETOC__&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmh</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=InLogic_SMS_Gateway&amp;diff=1442</id>
		<title>InLogic SMS Gateway</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=InLogic_SMS_Gateway&amp;diff=1442"/>
		<updated>2018-07-05T09:02:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmh: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Important ==&lt;br /&gt;
To be able to send SMS, the inLogic SMS Gateway requires GSM modems with USB interface. We recommend &amp;quot;HUAWEI LTE USB Stick Model: E3372&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Network Port Openings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== TCP port openings from server to gateway. ====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Port&lt;br /&gt;
!Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|22&lt;br /&gt;
|SSH access&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|80&lt;br /&gt;
|HTTP access&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|443&lt;br /&gt;
|HTTPS access&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3306&lt;br /&gt;
|Database access&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== TCP port openings from gateway to server. ====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Port&lt;br /&gt;
!Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|80&lt;br /&gt;
|HTTP access&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|443&lt;br /&gt;
|HTTPS access&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Prepare Modem ==&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
![[File:20180516 104258-50%.jpg|none|thumb|800x800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
!Plug-in Modems&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:20180516 104358-50%.jpg|none|thumb|800x800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Plug-in Ethernet cable&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Plug-in power cable&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== System Login ==&lt;br /&gt;
Once the gateway is [[#Prepare Modem|prepared]] and booted, open a browser and go to http://192.168.1.2. Login through the &#039;Login&#039; button in the top right corner. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Main Login button.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
You will now see a login box where you can log in with with USERNAME: admin and PASSWORD: admin.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Login.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Main Page ==&lt;br /&gt;
After logging in, the system info page appears. This page shows the gateway&#039;s status.[[File:Main.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
To open the menu, click on this icon:  [[File:Foxbox menu button.png|frameless|23x23px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Main with menu.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Network Configuration ==&lt;br /&gt;
Click on menu tab &#039;Network config&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Change the IP settings and press &#039;Save Configuration&#039;. When you have saved your settings, [[InLogic SMS Gateway#Reboot|Reboot]] the gateway as instructed below in &#039;Modem Settings&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Network Config.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modem Settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hostname and Frontend Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Hostname ====&lt;br /&gt;
Open the menu and go to &#039;Modem Settings&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set &#039;Modem Hostname&#039; as FQDN and save your changes. Your modem will now restart.[[File:Modem Settings Hostname.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Frontend ====&lt;br /&gt;
Open the menu and go to &#039;Modem Settings&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Change &#039;FrontEnd Address&#039; to fit your configuration and save your settings.[[File:Modem Settings Frontend.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Certificate Settings (https) ===&lt;br /&gt;
Open the menu and go to &#039;Modem Settings&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;Choose File&#039; and choose a .pfx certificate from your computer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Entera a .pfx certificate password in the &#039;Certificate Password&#039; field and click &#039;Save&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings Certificate.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== User Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
Open the menu and go to &#039;Modem Settings&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default admin user password is &#039;admin&#039;. To change the default admin user password, write the new password in the &#039;Password&#039; field just below the &#039;Username&#039; field admin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default sendsms user password is &#039;sendsms&#039;. To change the default sendsms user password, write the new password in the &#039;Password&#039; field just below the &#039;Username&#039; field sendsms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;Save&#039; to confirm the password change.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings User.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Control Panel ==&lt;br /&gt;
Open the menu and go to &#039;Control Panel&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here, you can see staus, as well as turn on and off, the SMS Engine.[[File:Control Panel.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SMS ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inbox ===&lt;br /&gt;
To see a log for incoming messages, open the menu and go to &#039;Inbox&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Inbox.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Outbox ===&lt;br /&gt;
To see a log for outgoing messages, open the menu and go to &#039;Outbox&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Outbox.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Failed ===&lt;br /&gt;
To see a log for failed messages, open the menu and go to &#039;Failed&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Failed.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Write New ===&lt;br /&gt;
To write a new SMS, open the menu and go to &#039;Write New&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose the modem you wish to send your message from in the drop down menu &#039;Outgoing channel&#039;. If left blank, the system will choose the first available modem.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the phone number you wish to send your SMS to in the &#039;To&#039; field. Pleas note that international prefix is mandatory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Write your message in the &#039;Message&#039; field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you have finished, click &#039;Send&#039;.[[File:Write New guide.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Time Zone Settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
Open the menu and go to &#039;Time Zone Settings&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The NTP &amp;amp; Time Zone Settings is by default set to enable external NTP. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For internal NTP, uncheck the &#039;Enable External NTP&#039; box and write a list of NTP servers separated by comma, in the &#039;Internal NTP&#039; field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change your time zone, choose a time zone from the &#039;Time Zone&#039; drop down menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;Save&#039; to change your settings.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Time Zone Settings.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tools ==&lt;br /&gt;
Open the menu and go to &#039;Modem Settings&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Shell ===&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;in browser&#039; shell to change advanced settings. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u style=&amp;quot;color:red;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Use with caution!&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; Please note that if you make any changes without consulting us first, support will be charged accordingly with our hourly rate.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings Shell.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Root Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
Change of root password requires login to shell. Default root password is &#039;odroid&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Login to shell, run password command and follow the instructions on screen.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings Root.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
__FORCETOC__&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmh</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=InLogic_SMS_Gateway&amp;diff=1441</id>
		<title>InLogic SMS Gateway</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=InLogic_SMS_Gateway&amp;diff=1441"/>
		<updated>2018-07-05T09:00:20Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmh: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Important ==&lt;br /&gt;
To be able to send SMS, the inLogic Modem requires GSM modems with USB interface. We recommend &amp;quot;HUAWEI LTE USB Stick Model: E3372&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Network Port Openings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== TCP port openings from server to modem. ====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Port&lt;br /&gt;
!Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|22&lt;br /&gt;
|SSH access&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|80&lt;br /&gt;
|HTTP access&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|443&lt;br /&gt;
|HTTPS access&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3306&lt;br /&gt;
|Database access&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== TCP port openings from modem to server. ====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Port&lt;br /&gt;
!Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|80&lt;br /&gt;
|HTTP access&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|443&lt;br /&gt;
|HTTPS access&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Prepare Modem ==&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
![[File:20180516 104258-50%.jpg|none|thumb|800x800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
!Plug-in Modems&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:20180516 104358-50%.jpg|none|thumb|800x800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Plug-in Ethernet cable&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Plug-in power cable&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== System Login ==&lt;br /&gt;
Once the modem is [[#Prepare Modem|prepared]] and booted, open a browser and go to http://192.168.1.2. Login through the &#039;Login&#039; button in the top right corner. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Main Login button.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
You will now see a login box where you can log in with with USERNAME: admin and PASSWORD: admin.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Login.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Main Page ==&lt;br /&gt;
After logging in, the system info page appears. This page shows the modem&#039;s status.[[File:Main.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
To open the menu, click on this icon:  [[File:Foxbox menu button.png|frameless|23x23px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Main with menu.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Network Configuration ==&lt;br /&gt;
Click on menu tab &#039;Network config&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Change the IP settings and press &#039;Save Configuration&#039;. When you have saved your settings, [[Inlogicmodem#Reboot|Reboot]] the modem as instructed below in &#039;Modem Settings&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Network Config.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modem Settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hostname and Frontend Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Hostname ====&lt;br /&gt;
Open the menu and go to &#039;Modem Settings&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set &#039;Modem Hostname&#039; as FQDN and save your changes. Your modem will now restart.[[File:Modem Settings Hostname.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Frontend ====&lt;br /&gt;
Open the menu and go to &#039;Modem Settings&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Change &#039;FrontEnd Address&#039; to fit your configuration and save your settings.[[File:Modem Settings Frontend.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Certificate Settings (https) ===&lt;br /&gt;
Open the menu and go to &#039;Modem Settings&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;Choose File&#039; and choose a .pfx certificate from your computer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Entera a .pfx certificate password in the &#039;Certificate Password&#039; field and click &#039;Save&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings Certificate.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== User Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
Open the menu and go to &#039;Modem Settings&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default admin user password is &#039;admin&#039;. To change the default admin user password, write the new password in the &#039;Password&#039; field just below the &#039;Username&#039; field admin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default sendsms user password is &#039;sendsms&#039;. To change the default sendsms user password, write the new password in the &#039;Password&#039; field just below the &#039;Username&#039; field sendsms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;Save&#039; to confirm the password change.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings User.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Control Panel ==&lt;br /&gt;
Open the menu and go to &#039;Control Panel&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here, you can see staus, as well as turn on and off, the SMS Engine.[[File:Control Panel.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SMS ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inbox ===&lt;br /&gt;
To see a log for incoming messages, open the menu and go to &#039;Inbox&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Inbox.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Outbox ===&lt;br /&gt;
To see a log for outgoing messages, open the menu and go to &#039;Outbox&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Outbox.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Failed ===&lt;br /&gt;
To see a log for failed messages, open the menu and go to &#039;Failed&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Failed.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Write New ===&lt;br /&gt;
To write a new SMS, open the menu and go to &#039;Write New&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose the modem you wish to send your message from in the drop down menu &#039;Outgoing channel&#039;. If left blank, the system will choose the first available modem.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the phone number you wish to send your SMS to in the &#039;To&#039; field. Pleas note that international prefix is mandatory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Write your message in the &#039;Message&#039; field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you have finished, click &#039;Send&#039;.[[File:Write New guide.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Time Zone Settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
Open the menu and go to &#039;Time Zone Settings&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The NTP &amp;amp; Time Zone Settings is by default set to enable external NTP. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For internal NTP, uncheck the &#039;Enable External NTP&#039; box and write a list of NTP servers separated by comma, in the &#039;Internal NTP&#039; field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change your time zone, choose a time zone from the &#039;Time Zone&#039; drop down menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;Save&#039; to change your settings.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Time Zone Settings.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tools ==&lt;br /&gt;
Open the menu and go to &#039;Modem Settings&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Shell ===&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;in browser&#039; shell to change advanced settings. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u style=&amp;quot;color:red;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Use with caution!&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; Please note that if you make any changes without consulting us first, support will be charged accordingly with our hourly rate.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings Shell.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Root Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
Change of root password requires login to shell. Default root password is &#039;odroid&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Login to shell, run password command and follow the instructions on screen.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings Root.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
__FORCETOC__&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmh</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=InLogic_SMS_Gateway&amp;diff=1440</id>
		<title>InLogic SMS Gateway</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=InLogic_SMS_Gateway&amp;diff=1440"/>
		<updated>2018-07-05T08:37:08Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmh: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Important ==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Certificate is required for use of inLogic SMS Gateway&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To be able to send SMS the inLogic SMS Gateway requires GSM modems with USB interface. We recommend to use [https://www.google.dk/search?source=hp&amp;amp;ei=pYgOW8SiCsPGkwWtuqeYCg&amp;amp;q=e3372h-153+huawei&amp;amp;oq=E3372H-153+hua&amp;amp;gs_l=psy-ab.3.0.0i22i30k1l6j0i22i10i30k1j0i22i30k1l3.59976.65229.0.66810.9.7.2.0.0.0.277.1016.1j5j1.7.0....0...1c.1.64.psy-ab..0.8.927...0j0i30k1.0.OdcBHMK8-i0 HUAWEI LTE USB Stick Model: E3372H-153].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Network Port Openings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== TCP port openings from server to gateway ====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Port&lt;br /&gt;
!Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|22&lt;br /&gt;
|SSH access&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|80&lt;br /&gt;
|HTTP access&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|443&lt;br /&gt;
|HTTPS access&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3306&lt;br /&gt;
|Database access&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== TCP port openings from gateway to server. ====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Port&lt;br /&gt;
!Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|80&lt;br /&gt;
|HTTP access&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|443&lt;br /&gt;
|HTTPS access&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Prepare Modem ==&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
![[File:20180516 104258-50%.jpg|none|thumb|800x800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
!Plug-in Modems&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:20180516 104358-50%.jpg|none|thumb|800x800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Plug-in Ethernet cable&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Plug-in power cable&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== System Login ==&lt;br /&gt;
Once the modem is [[#Prepare Modem|prepared]] and booted, browse to &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://192.168.1.2&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; and click login in the upper right corner.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Main Login button.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
A login box will pop up where you can login with USERNAME: admin and PASSWORD: admin.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Login.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Main Page ==&lt;br /&gt;
After logging in, the system info page appears. This page shows status for the gateway.[[File:Main.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Click the hamburger icon in the top right corner to open the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Main with menu.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Network Configuration ==&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;Network Config&#039; in the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Change the IP settings and press &#039;Save Configuration&#039;. [[Inlogicgateway|Reboot]] the gateway on the &#039;inLogic Modem Settings&#039; page.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Network Config.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Gateway Settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Frontend and Hostname Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Hostname ====&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;Modem Settings&#039; in the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set &#039;Modem Hostname&#039; as FQDN.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Scroll down and click &#039;Save&#039;. The modem will now restart.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings Hostname.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Frontend ====&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;Modem Settings&#039; in the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Change &#039;FrontEnd Address&#039; to fit your configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Scroll down and click &#039;Save&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings Frontend.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Certificate(https) Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;Modem Settings&#039; in the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;Choose File&#039; and choose a pfx certificate from your hard drive, USB stick, or other media.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the pfx certificate password in the &#039;Certificate Password&#039; box and click &#039;Save&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings Certificate.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== User Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
In the menu, click &#039;Modem Settings&#039; and scroll down to &#039;User Settings&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default admin user password is &#039;admin&#039;. To change the default password, write your new password in the field &#039;Password&#039; right below admin username.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default sendsms user password is &#039;sendsms&#039;. To change the default password, write your new password in the field &#039;Password&#039; right below sendsms username.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;Save&#039; to confirm the password change.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings User.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Control Panel ==&lt;br /&gt;
Choose &#039;Control Panel&#039; from the menu click. In the Control Panel, you can see the status for the SMS engine. From here, you can also turn the SMS engine on and off.[[File:Control Panel.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SMS ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inbox ===&lt;br /&gt;
To see a log of incoming messages, choose &#039;Inbox&#039; from the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Inbox.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Outbox ===&lt;br /&gt;
To see a log of outgoing messages, choose &#039;Outbox&#039; from the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Outbox.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Failed ===&lt;br /&gt;
To see a log of failed messages, choose &#039;Failed&#039; from the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Failed.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Write New ===&lt;br /&gt;
Choose &#039;Write New&#039; from the menu to see a log of outgoing messages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;background-color: #FFFF00&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Choose what modem to send from or leave as is to choose first free modem.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;background-color: #00FF00&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Insert mobile phone number to send to. (international prefix is mandatory)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;background-color: #0000FF; color: #FFFFFF&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Write text to send.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Send” to continue.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Write New guide.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Time Zone Settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
In the menu click &amp;quot;Time Zone Settings&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Time zone and NTP server settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For External NTP servers check Enable External NTP (default) and choose External NTP Region (Default Europe)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Internal NTP, uncheck Enable External NTP and write comma separated list of NTP servers in Internal NTP textbox.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To set your Time Zone, click Time Zone dropdown and choose your zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click Save to change configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Time Zone Settings.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tools ==&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;Modem Settings&amp;quot; in menu and go to bottom of page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Shell ===&lt;br /&gt;
In browser shell to change advanced settings (&amp;lt;u style=&amp;quot;color:red;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;use with caution&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;)&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings Shell.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Reboot ===&lt;br /&gt;
Reboot modem.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings Reboot.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Root Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
Change of root password requires login to shell. (default root password is &amp;quot;odroid&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Login to shell, run passwd command and follow instructions on screen.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings Root.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
__FORCETOC__&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmh</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=InLogic_SMS_Gateway&amp;diff=1438</id>
		<title>InLogic SMS Gateway</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=InLogic_SMS_Gateway&amp;diff=1438"/>
		<updated>2018-07-05T08:03:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmh: Created page with &amp;quot;== Important == &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Certificate is required for use of Modem&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  To be able to send SMS the inLogicModem requires GSM modems with USB interface. We recommend &amp;quot;HUAWEI LTE...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Important ==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Certificate is required for use of Modem&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To be able to send SMS the inLogicModem requires GSM modems with USB interface. We recommend &amp;quot;HUAWEI LTE USB Stick Model: E3372&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Network Port Openings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== TCP port openings from server to modem. ====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Port&lt;br /&gt;
!Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|22&lt;br /&gt;
|SSH access&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|80&lt;br /&gt;
|HTTP access&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|443&lt;br /&gt;
|HTTPS access&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3306&lt;br /&gt;
|Database access&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== TCP port openings from modem to server. ====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Port&lt;br /&gt;
!Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|80&lt;br /&gt;
|HTTP access&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|443&lt;br /&gt;
|HTTPS access&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Prepare Modem ==&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
![[File:20180516 104258-50%.jpg|none|thumb|800x800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
!Plug-in Modems&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:20180516 104358-50%.jpg|none|thumb|800x800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Plug-in Ethernet cable&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Plug-in power cable&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== System Login ==&lt;br /&gt;
Once modem is [[#Prepare Modem|prepared]] and booted, browse to &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://192.168.1.2&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; and click login in upper right corner.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Main Login button.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Login box will popup, and here login with USERNAME: admin and PASSWORD: admin&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Login.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Main Page ==&lt;br /&gt;
After login the system info page appears.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Shows status of the modem.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Main.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Click the [[File:Foxbox menu button.png|frameless|23x23px]] to open menu&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Main with menu.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Network Configuration ==&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Network Config” in menu&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Change IP settings and press “Save Configuration”, [[Inlogicmodem#Reboot|Reboot]] modem on “inLogic Modem Settings” page.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Network Config.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modem Settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Frontend and Hostname Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Hostname ====&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Modem Settings” in the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set Modem Hostname as FQDN.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Scroll down and Click “Save” and the modem will restart.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings Hostname.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Frontend ====&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Modem Settings” in menu&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Change FrontEnd Address to fit your configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Scroll down and Click “Save”&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings Frontend.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Certificate(https) Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Modem Settings” in menu&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;Choose File&amp;quot; and choose pfx certificate from your harddrive/USB stick/other media.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter pfx certificate password in &amp;quot;Certificate Password&amp;quot; box and click &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings Certificate.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== User Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
In the menu click “Modem Settings” and scroll down to “User Settings”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change default admin user password (default “admin”), write new password in Password box just below admin username.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change default sendsms user password (default “sendsms”), write new password in Password box just below sendsms username.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Save” to confirm password change.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings User.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Control Panel ==&lt;br /&gt;
In the menu click &amp;quot;Control Panel&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use Control Panel to see State of SMS Engine, turn on/off SMS Engine.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Control Panel.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SMS ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inbox ===&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Inbox” in menu to see a log of incoming messages.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Inbox.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Outbox ===&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Outbox” in menu to see a log of outgoing messages.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Outbox.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Failed ===&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Failed” in menu to see a log of failed messages.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Failed.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Write New ===&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Write New” in menu to see a log of outgoing messages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;background-color: #FFFF00&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Choose what modem to send from or leave as is to choose first free modem.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;background-color: #00FF00&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Insert mobile phone number to send to. (international prefix is mandatory)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;background-color: #0000FF; color: #FFFFFF&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Write text to send.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Send” to continue.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Write New guide.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Time Zone Settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
In the menu click &amp;quot;Time Zone Settings&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Time zone and NTP server settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For External NTP servers check Enable External NTP (default) and choose External NTP Region (Default Europe)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Internal NTP, uncheck Enable External NTP and write comma separated list of NTP servers in Internal NTP textbox.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To set your Time Zone, click Time Zone dropdown and choose your zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click Save to change configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Time Zone Settings.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tools ==&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;Modem Settings&amp;quot; in menu and go to bottom of page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Shell ===&lt;br /&gt;
In browser shell to change advanced settings (&amp;lt;u style=&amp;quot;color:red;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;use with caution&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;)&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings Shell.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Reboot ===&lt;br /&gt;
Reboot modem.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings Reboot.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Root Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
Change of root password requires login to shell. (default root password is &amp;quot;odroid&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Login to shell, run passwd command and follow instructions on screen.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings Root.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
__FORCETOC__&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmh</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=Apple_Developer_Account&amp;diff=1437</id>
		<title>Apple Developer Account</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=Apple_Developer_Account&amp;diff=1437"/>
		<updated>2018-07-05T07:35:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmh: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;This guide describes how to create your Apple Developer Account and give access to inLogic to administrate your app.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Create Apple Developer Account ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you do not have an Apple ID for your organization already, you can follow this guide to create one:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://appleid.apple.com/account&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After creating your account, you need to enroll for Apple Developer Program. Follow the guide below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
https://developer.apple.com/programs/enroll/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Add App Store Connect User ==&lt;br /&gt;
inLogic will need access to be able to create and upload new updates for your app. You do so by adding our account as &#039;another App Store Connect User&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to https://appstoreconnect.apple.com/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select &#039;Users and Roles&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Appstore usersandroles.png|none|thumb|164x164px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Select the plus icon.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Appstore plusicon.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
Fill in the &#039;User Information&#039; with the following information and click &#039;Next&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AppstoreUserInformation.png|none|thumb|445x445px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Check the role &#039;App Manager&#039; and make sure that access is given to &#039;All apps&#039;. You can also give limited access to apps in case there are apps inLogic do not need access to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select Next&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AppstoreAddAppStoreConnectUsers.png|none|thumb|743x743px]]&lt;br /&gt;
For App Status Reports select &#039;All Territories&#039; and click &#039;Save&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AppstoreNotifications.png|none|thumb|1117x1117px]]&lt;br /&gt;
You will now see that a confirmation email has been sent to inLogic.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AppstoreConfirmationEmail.png|none|thumb|519x519px]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmh</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=Intranote&amp;diff=1409</id>
		<title>Intranote</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=Intranote&amp;diff=1409"/>
		<updated>2018-06-22T09:57:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmh: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The DocuNote integration allows IntraNote to retrieve data from the UMS web server. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Prerequisites ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Module requirements ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[UMS]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== What to have ready ===&lt;br /&gt;
An opened firewall directly into the UMS. Typically port 80 or 443&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Installation ==&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Configurator/Webservice|Webservice]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Template Setting ===&lt;br /&gt;
Create a Intranote setting than will be attached to a template. Intranote can only retrieve data from the templates that have an option attached.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Intranote.png|815x815px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
UMS will generate a department code when pressing Generate. department code must be used in Intranote to retrieve data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Technical settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== FAQ ==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmh</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=Search_filter_and_criteria&amp;diff=1374</id>
		<title>Search filter and criteria</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=Search_filter_and_criteria&amp;diff=1374"/>
		<updated>2018-06-06T13:41:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmh: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Please note that some LMS integrations may not use &#039;sites&#039; but rooms, cohorts, drives, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Search filter and criteria - Activity ==&lt;br /&gt;
This will enable you to link sites that would have been created as two or more sites. Thus, they will be created as one site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Remarks ===&lt;br /&gt;
This is just for description purposes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Filter ===&lt;br /&gt;
This is the SQL like filter (regular expression). If an activity matches, it will be subject to the settings in &#039;Semester roll&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Semester roll ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Use replace string with empty ====&lt;br /&gt;
This will replace a section of the site with an empty string.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Start index ====&lt;br /&gt;
Determines where in the string it should start to remove.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Length ====&lt;br /&gt;
How many characters that will be removed from the string.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Add activity short description to node ID ====&lt;br /&gt;
This will add the field &#039;Kort_Betegnelse&#039; (Short Description) from the students&#039; table to the node ID. The node ID is the URL.[[File:Search filter and criteria (Activity).png|none|thumb|401x401px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Examples ===&lt;br /&gt;
Set the settings as shown below. This will create one site for &#039;English&#039; levels 1, 2, and 3. The filter &#039;English[123]&#039; ensures that it is only applied to activities that matches this SQL sentence. [[File:Office365filterexample.png|none|thumb|361x361px]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Search filter and criteria - Course ==&lt;br /&gt;
This will enable you to link sites that would have been created as two or more sites. Thus, they will be created as one site. A course is always a child to an activity and therefore cannot exist without an activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Remarks ===&lt;br /&gt;
This is just for description purposes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Course Filter ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Filter ====&lt;br /&gt;
The SQL like filter (regular expression). If an activity matches, it will be subject to the settings below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Use replace string with empty ====&lt;br /&gt;
This will replace a section of the site with an empty string.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Start index ====&lt;br /&gt;
Determines where in the string it should start to remove.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Length ====&lt;br /&gt;
How many characters that will be removed from the string.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Activity Filter ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Filter ====&lt;br /&gt;
The SQL like filter (regular expression). If an activity matches, it will be subject to the settings below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Use replace string with empty ====&lt;br /&gt;
This will replace a section of the site with an empty string.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Start index ====&lt;br /&gt;
Determines where in the string it should start to remove.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Length ====&lt;br /&gt;
How many characters that will be removed from the string.[[File:Search filter and criteria (Course).png|none|thumb|372x372px]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Example ===&lt;br /&gt;
This is an example for if you have an activity with multiple courses attached and you only want one site. Set the settings as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will create one site for &#039;9a English&#039; for levels 1, 2, and 3. The filters &#039;English[123]&#039; and &#039;9a&#039; ensure that it is only applied to courses that matches this SQL sentence.[[File:Search filter and criteria (Course) Example.png|none|thumb|399x399px]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmh</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=Site_selection_settings&amp;diff=1373</id>
		<title>Site selection settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=Site_selection_settings&amp;diff=1373"/>
		<updated>2018-06-06T13:16:59Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmh: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Please note that some LMS integrations may not use &#039;sites&#039; but rooms, cohorts, drives, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Although the pictures on this page show Moodle, the settings described are generic for all our LMS integrations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Activity sites ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Do not create ====&lt;br /&gt;
Do not create any activities from templates that use this setting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== LMS has to be checked ====&lt;br /&gt;
Only create activities where &#039;Aktivitet_LMS&#039; is set to true in the students&#039; table . This information is extracted from the administrative system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Based on template filter ====&lt;br /&gt;
This will open a new option on the templates using this setting. Please see picture in the example below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== All ====&lt;br /&gt;
Creates every activity found in the templates (not recommended).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Search filter and criteria ====&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Search filter and criteria]].[[File:LMS Site selection settings Activity settings.png|none|thumb|385x385px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Example ====&lt;br /&gt;
In this example, only activities that starts with &#039;Eng&#039; and activities with the full name &#039;Spanish&#039; will be created.[[File:LMS Site selection settings Template Filter settings Activity.png|none|thumb|503x503px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Course sites ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Do not create ====&lt;br /&gt;
Do not create any courses from templates that use this setting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== LMS has to be checked ====&lt;br /&gt;
Only create courses where &#039;Skolefag_LMS&#039; is set to true in the students&#039; table . This information is extracted from the administrative system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Based on template filter ====&lt;br /&gt;
This will open a new option on the templates using this setting. Please see picture in the example below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== All ====&lt;br /&gt;
Creates all courses found in the templates (not recommended).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Search filter and criteria ====&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Search filter and criteria]].[[File:LMS Site selection settings Course settings.png|none|thumb|375x375px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Example ====&lt;br /&gt;
In this example, only courses that starts with &#039;Eng&#039; and courses with the full name &#039;Spanish&#039; will be created. [[File:LMS Site selection settings Template Filter settings Course.png|none|thumb|503x503px]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmh</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=LMS_Settings&amp;diff=1372</id>
		<title>LMS Settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=LMS_Settings&amp;diff=1372"/>
		<updated>2018-06-06T12:52:54Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmh: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Please note that the settings described below cannot be found in all LMS integrations. Furthermore, some LMS integrations may not use &#039;sites&#039; but rooms, cohorts, drives, etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Automation Type ===&lt;br /&gt;
This is not in use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Remove learner method ===&lt;br /&gt;
A user is removed from a site when:&lt;br /&gt;
*The user is deleted in AD (i.e. if he or she graduated or moved away) or no longer has an active record in UMS. This is normally at the same time as the user is disabled in AD. This means that the user will have access to previous sites from all past terms&lt;br /&gt;
*The user stops being active on the site while the activity/course is still active&lt;br /&gt;
*The user stops or is removed from an activity or a course in the administrative system while the activity/course is still active. The user will only have access to the site as long as he is active on it in the administrative system&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Delete sites ===&lt;br /&gt;
A site is deleted when there are no more students connected to it in UMS. There are two ways to delete a site:&lt;br /&gt;
* Auto delete. The site will automatically be deleted in the system when there are no more students connected to it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Manual delete. The site will only be deleted in UMS and not in the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Send mail to teacher(s) ===&lt;br /&gt;
Send an e-mail to teachers when they are connected to a site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Start publishing days before ===&lt;br /&gt;
This indicates how many days a site should be active before it is published and visible for students. This must be a lower number than &#039;Create Days before&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Create Days before ===&lt;br /&gt;
This indicates how many days a site should be created before it is active. This must be a higher number than &#039;Start publishing days before&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Delete Days after end ===&lt;br /&gt;
A site is closed when all students have been removed. &#039;Delete Days after end&#039; indicates how many days the site should be in the system before UMS deletes it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Teachers&#039; rights on sites ===&lt;br /&gt;
What access should the teachers have when added to the site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Students&#039; rights on sites ===&lt;br /&gt;
What access should the students have when added to the site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SQL Groups ===&lt;br /&gt;
If a site is created with a setting where SQL Groups are used, members of the security groups inserted here will have teacher rights and access to that site. Please note that the group name written only covers that specific security group. If there are several security groups with similar names, letters before &#039;%&#039; will cover all groups with those letters. I.e. if there are English 1, English 2, and English 3, the group name &#039;Eng%&#039; will cover all three security groups.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:LMS Settings SQL groups.png|none|thumb]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmh</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=LMS_Settings&amp;diff=1371</id>
		<title>LMS Settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=LMS_Settings&amp;diff=1371"/>
		<updated>2018-06-06T12:52:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmh: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Please note that the settings described below cannot be found in all LMS integrations. Furthermore, some LMS integrations may not use &#039;sites&#039; but rooms, cohorts, drives, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Automation Type ===&lt;br /&gt;
This is not in use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Remove learner method ===&lt;br /&gt;
A user is removed from a site when:&lt;br /&gt;
*The user is deleted in AD (i.e. if he or she graduated or moved away) or no longer has an active record in UMS. This is normally at the same time as the user is disabled in AD. This means that the user will have access to previous sites from all past terms&lt;br /&gt;
*The user stops being active on the site while the activity/course is still active&lt;br /&gt;
*The user stops or is removed from an activity or a course in the administrative system while the activity/course is still active. The user will only have access to the site as long as he is active on it in the administrative system&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Delete sites ===&lt;br /&gt;
A site is deleted when there are no more students connected to it in UMS. There are two ways to delete a site:&lt;br /&gt;
* Auto delete. The site will automatically be deleted in the system when there are no more students connected to it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Manual delete. The site will only be deleted in UMS and not in the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Send mail to teacher(s) ===&lt;br /&gt;
Send an e-mail to teachers when they are connected to a site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Start publishing days before ===&lt;br /&gt;
This indicates how many days a site should be active before it is published and visible for students. This must be a lower number than &#039;Create Days before&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Create Days before ===&lt;br /&gt;
This indicates how many days a site should be created before it is active. This must be a higher number than &#039;Start publishing days before&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Delete Days after end ===&lt;br /&gt;
A site is closed when all students have been removed. &#039;Delete Days after end&#039; indicates how many days the site should be in the system before UMS deletes it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Teachers&#039; rights on sites ===&lt;br /&gt;
What access should the teachers have when added to the site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Students&#039; rights on sites ===&lt;br /&gt;
What access should the students have when added to the site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SQL Groups ===&lt;br /&gt;
If a site is created with a setting where SQL Groups are used, members of the security groups inserted here will have teacher rights and access to that site. Please note that the group name written only covers that specific security group. If there are several security groups with similar names, letters before &#039;%&#039; will cover all groups with those letters. I.e. if there are English 1, English 2, and English 3, the group name &#039;Eng%&#039; will cover all three security groups.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:LMS Settings SQL groups.png|none|thumb]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmh</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=LMS_Settings&amp;diff=1370</id>
		<title>LMS Settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=LMS_Settings&amp;diff=1370"/>
		<updated>2018-06-06T12:50:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmh: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Please note that the settings described below cannot be found in all LMS integrations. Furthermore, some LMS integrations may not use &#039;sites&#039; but rooms, cohorts, drives, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== &#039;&#039;&#039;Automation Type&#039;&#039;&#039; ===&lt;br /&gt;
This is not in use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== &#039;&#039;&#039;Remove learner method&#039;&#039;&#039; ===&lt;br /&gt;
A user is removed from a site when:&lt;br /&gt;
*The user is deleted in AD (i.e. if he or she graduated or moved away) or no longer has an active record in UMS. This is normally at the same time as the user is disabled in AD. This means that the user will have access to previous sites from all past terms&lt;br /&gt;
*The user stops being active on the site while the activity/course is still active&lt;br /&gt;
*The user stops or is removed from an activity or a course in the administrative system while the activity/course is still active. The user will only have access to the site as long as he is active on it in the administrative system&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== &#039;&#039;&#039;Delete sites&#039;&#039;&#039; ===&lt;br /&gt;
A site is deleted when there are no more students connected to it in UMS. There are two ways to delete a site:&lt;br /&gt;
* Auto delete. The site will automatically be deleted in the system when there are no more students connected to it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Manual delete. The site will only be deleted in UMS and not in the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== &#039;&#039;&#039;Send mail to teacher(s)&#039;&#039;&#039; ===&lt;br /&gt;
Send an e-mail to teachers when they are connected to a site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== &#039;&#039;&#039;Start publishing days before&#039;&#039;&#039; ===&lt;br /&gt;
This indicates how many days a site should be active before it is published and visible for students. This must be a lower number than &#039;Create Days before&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== &#039;&#039;&#039;Create Days before&#039;&#039;&#039; ===&lt;br /&gt;
This indicates how many days a site should be created before it is active. This must be a higher number than &#039;Start publishing days before&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== &#039;&#039;&#039;Delete Days after end&#039;&#039;&#039; ===&lt;br /&gt;
A site is closed when all students have been removed. &#039;Delete Days after end&#039; indicates how many days the site should be in the system before UMS deletes it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== &#039;&#039;&#039;Teachers&#039; rights on sites&#039;&#039;&#039; ===&lt;br /&gt;
What access should the teachers have when added to the site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== &#039;&#039;&#039;Students&#039; rights on sites&#039;&#039;&#039; ===&lt;br /&gt;
What access should the students have when added to the site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== &#039;&#039;&#039;SQL Groups&#039;&#039;&#039; ===&lt;br /&gt;
If a site is created with a setting where SQL Groups are used, members of the security groups inserted here will have teacher rights and access to that site. Please note that the group name written only covers that specific security group. If there are several security groups with similar names, letters before &#039;%&#039; will cover all groups with those letters. I.e. if there are English 1, English 2, and English 3, the group name &#039;Eng%&#039; will cover all three security groups.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:LMS Settings SQL groups.png|none|thumb]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmh</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=Itslearning&amp;diff=1369</id>
		<title>Itslearning</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=Itslearning&amp;diff=1369"/>
		<updated>2018-06-06T11:44:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmh: /* Site */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Our itslearning integration is developed for schools that want to avoid hour-long administrative tasks. The integration automatically creates, maintains, and deletes users based on data from your student administrative system. It also creates and maintains group rooms, which teachers and students can use for teaching purposes. The rooms automatically use the language you require and can be categorized according to your needs, making them easier to find. Rooms that are no longer in use are deleted automatically. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configuration in UMS ===&lt;br /&gt;
This allows users to log into itslearning with the same password they use to access the school’s IT-system. The itslearning integration gives you an easy overview and ensures that the users’ data is always managed correctly, without requiring any manual updates. This frees up time for the IT-department so they can focus on other tasks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Prerequisites ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Module requirements ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[UMS]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== What to have ready ===&lt;br /&gt;
itslearning&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Installation ==&lt;br /&gt;
Open UMS Configurator and go to Template &amp;gt; itslearning. Click the first manage button.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Itslearning Template.jpg|none|thumb|791x791px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will now see an overview of your itslearning settings.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Itslearning Settings.jpg|none|thumb|556x556px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== itslearning settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
To configurate your settings, go to &#039;Edit existing template&#039; and choose itslearning. Click &#039;Manage&#039; and &#039;Add&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Description ====&lt;br /&gt;
Give the Site settings a name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Organization settings ====&lt;br /&gt;
Choose the Organization setting you want to use for this site setting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Template security groups ====&lt;br /&gt;
Check the box to create, update, and delete template security groups that has an itslearning setting attached.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Upload student information ===&lt;br /&gt;
Check these boxes to send and update information on students:&lt;br /&gt;
* Address&lt;br /&gt;
* Phone&lt;br /&gt;
* Mobile Phone&lt;br /&gt;
* Mail&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Upload employee information ===&lt;br /&gt;
Check these boxes to send and update information on employees:&lt;br /&gt;
* Address&lt;br /&gt;
* Phone&lt;br /&gt;
* Mobile Phone&lt;br /&gt;
* Mail&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Itslearning Settings Edit.jpg|none|thumb|751x751px]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Site ===&lt;br /&gt;
See [[LMS Settings]] for options that are not described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Language ====&lt;br /&gt;
The language used for a site when it is created&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Course category ====&lt;br /&gt;
The category is put on the site when it is created&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Activity sites ====&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Site selection settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Course sites ====&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Site selection settings]][[File:Itslearning Settings Edit Site Settings.jpg|none|thumb|895x895px]]&lt;br /&gt;
== Organization settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Itslearning Organization Settings.jpg|link=http://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php/File:Itslearning%20Organization%20Settings.jpg|none|thumb|556x556px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Description ====&lt;br /&gt;
Give your Organization setting a name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Username ====&lt;br /&gt;
Type your username for API connection (contact itslearning to acquire your username).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Password ====&lt;br /&gt;
Type your password for API connection (contact itslearning to acquire your password).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Source organization ====&lt;br /&gt;
Type the source organization for API connection (contact itslearning to acquire the source organization).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== SQL Criteria ====&lt;br /&gt;
This is an overall SQL sentence that is used when creating groups. It is used in conjunction with the sub account settings. This has no impact on courses being created. If left blank there are no criteria.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Installation ID ====&lt;br /&gt;
Type the password for the user with access to the database.[[File:Itslearning Organization Settings Edit.jpg|link=http://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php/File:Itslearning%20Organization%20Settings%20Edit.jpg|none|thumb|324x324px]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sub accounts ===&lt;br /&gt;
This section explains how to create a hierarchy in itslearning. [[File:Itslearning Sub accounts.jpg|none|thumb|620x620px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== DisplayName ====&lt;br /&gt;
This is an overall SQL sentence that is used when creating groups. It is used in conjunction with the sub account settings. This has no impact on courses being created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Database field ====&lt;br /&gt;
Select a column from the students table use the contents of that column to build the hierarchy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== SQL Criteria ====&lt;br /&gt;
Select only rows that match the SQL sentence. If left blank there are no criteria.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Example of how UMS will build a hierarchy ====&lt;br /&gt;
The first two root elements come from the &#039;&amp;lt;nowiki/&amp;gt;Sub accounts&#039; settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All courses that UMS creates will be put in &#039;UMS Courses&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All groups will be sorted in the hierarchy. Groups that are not sorted in the hierarchy will be put in &#039;UMS Groups&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All template security groups will be created in &#039;UMS Template Groups&#039;.[[File:Itslearning hierarchy.jpg|none|thumb|920x920px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Site Settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
You need to attach a cohort setting to a template. This will tell UMS that cohorts will be created from this template.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Itslearning Site Template Settings.jpg|none|thumb|556x556px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Description ====&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a description for this setting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Template ====&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a template that is used when creating courses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== SQL Groups ====&lt;br /&gt;
See [[LMS Settings]] for this option.[[File:Itslearning Site Template Settings Edit.jpg|none|thumb|422x422px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Group Settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
You need to attach a cohort setting to a template. This will tell UMS that cohorts will be created from this template.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Itslearning Group Template Settings.jpg|none|thumb|556x556px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Description ====&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a description for this setting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Template ====&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a template that is used when creating groups.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== SQL Groups ====&lt;br /&gt;
See [[LMS Settings]] for this option.[[File:Itslearning Group Template Settings Edit.jpg|none|thumb|422x422px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== FAQ ==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmh</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=Itslearning&amp;diff=1368</id>
		<title>Itslearning</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=Itslearning&amp;diff=1368"/>
		<updated>2018-06-06T11:38:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmh: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Our itslearning integration is developed for schools that want to avoid hour-long administrative tasks. The integration automatically creates, maintains, and deletes users based on data from your student administrative system. It also creates and maintains group rooms, which teachers and students can use for teaching purposes. The rooms automatically use the language you require and can be categorized according to your needs, making them easier to find. Rooms that are no longer in use are deleted automatically. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configuration in UMS ===&lt;br /&gt;
This allows users to log into itslearning with the same password they use to access the school’s IT-system. The itslearning integration gives you an easy overview and ensures that the users’ data is always managed correctly, without requiring any manual updates. This frees up time for the IT-department so they can focus on other tasks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Prerequisites ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Module requirements ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[UMS]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== What to have ready ===&lt;br /&gt;
itslearning&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Installation ==&lt;br /&gt;
Open UMS Configurator and go to Template &amp;gt; itslearning. Click the first manage button.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Itslearning Template.jpg|none|thumb|791x791px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will now see an overview of your itslearning settings.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Itslearning Settings.jpg|none|thumb|556x556px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== itslearning settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
To configurate your settings, go to &#039;Edit existing template&#039;, choose itslearning, click &#039;Manage&#039; and &#039;Add&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Description ====&lt;br /&gt;
Give the Site settings a name&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Organization settings ====&lt;br /&gt;
Choose the Organization setting you want to use for this site setting&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Template security groups ====&lt;br /&gt;
Check the box to create, update, and delete template security groups that has an itslearning setting attached&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Upload student information ===&lt;br /&gt;
Check these boxes to send and update information on students&lt;br /&gt;
* Address&lt;br /&gt;
* Phone&lt;br /&gt;
* Mobile Phone&lt;br /&gt;
* Mail&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Upload employee information ===&lt;br /&gt;
Check these boxes to send and update information on employees&lt;br /&gt;
* Address&lt;br /&gt;
* Phone&lt;br /&gt;
* Mobile Phone&lt;br /&gt;
* Mail&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Itslearning Settings Edit.jpg|none|thumb|751x751px]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Site ===&lt;br /&gt;
See [[LMS Settings]] for options not described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Language ====&lt;br /&gt;
The language used for a site when it is created&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Course category ====&lt;br /&gt;
The category is put on the site when it is created&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Activity sites ====&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Site selection settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Course sites ====&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Site selection settings]][[File:Itslearning Settings Edit Site Settings.jpg|none|thumb|895x895px]]&lt;br /&gt;
== Organization settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
Go to ????[[File:Itslearning Organization Settings.jpg|link=http://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php/File:Itslearning%20Organization%20Settings.jpg|none|thumb|556x556px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Description ====&lt;br /&gt;
Give your Organization setting a name&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Username ====&lt;br /&gt;
Type your username for API connection (contact itslearning to acquire your username)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Password ====&lt;br /&gt;
Type your password for API connection (contact itslearning to acquire your password)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Source organization ====&lt;br /&gt;
Type the source organization for API connection (contact itslearning to acquire the source organization)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== SQL Criteria ====&lt;br /&gt;
This is an overall SQL sentence that is used when creating groups. It is used in conjunction with the sub account settings. This has no impact on courses being created. If left blank there are no criteria.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Installation ID ====&lt;br /&gt;
Type the password for the user with access to the database[[File:Itslearning Organization Settings Edit.jpg|link=http://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php/File:Itslearning%20Organization%20Settings%20Edit.jpg|none|thumb|324x324px]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sub accounts ===&lt;br /&gt;
This section explains how to create a hierarchy in itslearning. [[File:Itslearning Sub accounts.jpg|none|thumb|620x620px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== DisplayName ====&lt;br /&gt;
This is an overall SQL sentence that is used when creating groups. It is used in conjunction with the sub account settings. This has no impact on courses being created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Database field ====&lt;br /&gt;
Select a column from the students table use the contents of that column to build the hierarchy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== SQL Criteria ====&lt;br /&gt;
Select only rows that match the SQL sentence. If left blank there are no criteria.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Example of how UMS will build a hierarchy ====&lt;br /&gt;
The first two root elements come from the &#039;&amp;lt;nowiki/&amp;gt;Sub accounts&#039; settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All courses that UMS creates will be put in &#039;UMS Courses&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All groups will be sorted in the hierarchy. Groups that are not sorted in the hierarchy will be put in &#039;UMS Groups&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All template security groups will be created in &#039;UMS Template Groups&#039;.[[File:Itslearning hierarchy.jpg|none|thumb|920x920px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Site Settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
You need to attach a cohort setting to a template. This will tell UMS that cohorts will be created from this template.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Itslearning Site Template Settings.jpg|none|thumb|556x556px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Description ====&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a description for this setting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Template ====&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a template that is used when creating courses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== SQL Groups ====&lt;br /&gt;
See [[LMS Settings]] for this option.[[File:Itslearning Site Template Settings Edit.jpg|none|thumb|422x422px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Group Settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
You need to attach a cohort setting to a template. This will tell UMS that cohorts will be created from this template.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Itslearning Group Template Settings.jpg|none|thumb|556x556px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Description ====&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a description for this setting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Template ====&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a template that is used when creating groups.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== SQL Groups ====&lt;br /&gt;
See [[LMS Settings]] for this option.[[File:Itslearning Group Template Settings Edit.jpg|none|thumb|422x422px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== FAQ ==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmh</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=Itslearning&amp;diff=1367</id>
		<title>Itslearning</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=Itslearning&amp;diff=1367"/>
		<updated>2018-06-06T11:34:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmh: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Our itslearning integration is developed for schools that want to avoid hour-long administrative tasks. The integration automatically creates, maintains, and deletes users based on data from your student administrative system. It also creates and maintains group rooms, which teachers and students can use for teaching purposes. The rooms automatically use the language you require and can be categorized according to your needs, making them easier to find. Rooms that are no longer in use are deleted automatically. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configuration in UMS ===&lt;br /&gt;
This allows users to log into itslearning with the same password they use to access the school’s IT-system. The itslearning integration gives you an easy overview and ensures that the users’ data is always managed correctly, without requiring any manual updates. This frees up time for the IT-department so they can focus on other tasks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Prerequisites ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Module requirements ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[UMS]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== What to have ready ===&lt;br /&gt;
itslearning&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Installation ==&lt;br /&gt;
Open UMS Configurator and go to Template &amp;gt; itslearning. Click the first manage button.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Itslearning Template.jpg|none|thumb|791x791px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will now see an overview of your itslearning settings.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Itslearning Settings.jpg|none|thumb|556x556px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== itslearning settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
To configurate your settings, go to &#039;Edit existing template&#039;, choose itslearning, click &#039;Manage&#039; and &#039;Add&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== &#039;&#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039;&#039; ====&lt;br /&gt;
Give the Site settings a name&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== &#039;&#039;&#039;Organization settings&#039;&#039;&#039; ====&lt;br /&gt;
Choose the Organization setting you want to use for this site setting&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== &#039;&#039;&#039;Template security groups&#039;&#039;&#039; ====&lt;br /&gt;
Check the box to create, update, and delete template security groups that has an itslearning setting attached&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Upload student information ===&lt;br /&gt;
Check these boxes to send and update information on students&lt;br /&gt;
* Address&lt;br /&gt;
* Phone&lt;br /&gt;
* Mobile Phone&lt;br /&gt;
* Mail&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Upload employee information ===&lt;br /&gt;
Check these boxes to send and update information on employees&lt;br /&gt;
* Address&lt;br /&gt;
* Phone&lt;br /&gt;
* Mobile Phone&lt;br /&gt;
* Mail&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Itslearning Settings Edit.jpg|none|thumb|751x751px]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Site ===&lt;br /&gt;
See [[LMS Settings]] for options not described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== &#039;&#039;&#039;Language&#039;&#039;&#039; ====&lt;br /&gt;
The language used for a site when it is created&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== &#039;&#039;&#039;Course category&#039;&#039;&#039; ====&lt;br /&gt;
The category is put on the site when it is created&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== &#039;&#039;&#039;Activity sites&#039;&#039;&#039; ====&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Site selection settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== &#039;&#039;&#039;Course sites&#039;&#039;&#039; ====&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Site selection settings]][[File:Itslearning Settings Edit Site Settings.jpg|none|thumb|895x895px]]&lt;br /&gt;
== Organization settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
Go to ????[[File:Itslearning Organization Settings.jpg|link=http://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php/File:Itslearning%20Organization%20Settings.jpg|none|thumb|556x556px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== &#039;&#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039;&#039; ====&lt;br /&gt;
Give your Organization setting a name&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== &#039;&#039;&#039;Username&#039;&#039;&#039; ====&lt;br /&gt;
Type your username for API connection (contact itslearning to acquire your username)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== &#039;&#039;&#039;Password&#039;&#039;&#039; ====&lt;br /&gt;
Type your password for API connection (contact itslearning to acquire your password)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== &#039;&#039;&#039;Source organization&#039;&#039;&#039; ====&lt;br /&gt;
Type the source organization for API connection (contact itslearning to acquire the source organization)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== &#039;&#039;&#039;SQL Criteria&#039;&#039;&#039; ====&lt;br /&gt;
This is an overall SQL sentence that is used when creating groups. It is used in conjunction with the sub account settings. This has no impact on courses being created. If left blank there are no criteria.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== &#039;&#039;&#039;Installation ID&#039;&#039;&#039; ====&lt;br /&gt;
Type the password for the user with access to the database[[File:Itslearning Organization Settings Edit.jpg|link=http://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php/File:Itslearning%20Organization%20Settings%20Edit.jpg|none|thumb|324x324px]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sub accounts ===&lt;br /&gt;
This section explains how to create a hierarchy in itslearning. [[File:Itslearning Sub accounts.jpg|none|thumb|620x620px]]&#039;&#039;&#039;DisplayName&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is an overall SQL sentence that is used when creating groups. It is used in conjunction with the sub account settings. This has no impact on courses being created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Database field&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select a column from the students table use the contents of that column to build the hierarchy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SQL Criteria&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select only rows that match the SQL sentence. If left blank there are no criteria.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Example of how UMS will build a hierarchy ====&lt;br /&gt;
The first two root elements come from the &#039;&amp;lt;nowiki/&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Sub accounts&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All courses that UMS creates will be put in &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;UMS Courses&#039;.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All groups will be sorted in the hierarchy. Groups that are not sorted in the hierarchy will be put in &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;UMS Groups&#039;.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All template security groups will be created in &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;UMS Template Groups&#039;.&#039;&#039;&#039;[[File:Itslearning hierarchy.jpg|none|thumb|920x920px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Site Settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
You need to attach a cohort setting to a template. This will tell UMS that cohorts will be created from this template.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Itslearning Site Template Settings.jpg|none|thumb|556x556px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Itslearning Site Template Settings Edit.jpg|none|thumb|422x422px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a description for this setting&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Template&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a template that is used when creating courses&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SQL Groups&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[LMS Settings]] for this option&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Group Settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
You need to attach a cohort setting to a template. This will tell UMS that cohorts will be created from this template.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Itslearning Group Template Settings.jpg|none|thumb|556x556px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Itslearning Group Template Settings Edit.jpg|none|thumb|422x422px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a description for this setting&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Template&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a template that is used when creating groups&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SQL Groups&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[LMS Settings]] for this option&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== FAQ ==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmh</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=Welcome_to_UMS_Wiki&amp;diff=1355</id>
		<title>Welcome to UMS Wiki</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=Welcome_to_UMS_Wiki&amp;diff=1355"/>
		<updated>2018-05-25T12:56:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmh: /* Manuals */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:UMS-Web-og-app-400.png|thumb|340x340px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Welcome to UMS Wiki. This wiki contains technical information about UMS. UMS is developed to help the school’s IT-department avoid trivial and hour-long administration tasks. UMS is short for User Management System and it is a system&lt;br /&gt;
developed especially for the educational sector. UMS is a standard solution, which makes it easy to update and maintain, however, because UMS is built using optional modules, it can be tailored to your school’s individual needs. That way you get a simple and effective solution containing everything you need – nothing more, nothing less.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Are you seeking general information please visit our [http://www.inlogic.dk/en/ inLogic website www.inlogic.dk]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What is UMS? ==&lt;br /&gt;
Watch our [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=MI2Wh8ic2hk video] and find out more. UMS is developed to help the school’s IT-department avoid trivial and hour-long administration tasks. However, the school’s teachers and students will benefit from it too, via web and app. Want to know how? Find out in the text below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;UMS reduces the IT-department’s workload&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With UMS, manual user creation is a thing of the past. UMS automatically creates and maintains users in Active Directory, Google Apps, Office 365 and learning management systems, based on data from the student administration system. UMS also gives the school’s students and staff access to a self-service portal, where they can reset their own password, thus saving time for the IT-department.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;UMS gives teachers more time to teach&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Many teachers find themselves with a multitude of administrative tasks they need do to, in addition to their other tasks. This could ultimately reduce the amount time they have to teach. To avoid that, UMS makes it possible to complete the administrative tasks quickly and easily via the UMS self-service portal, app and SMS modules, thus giving teachers more time to teach.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;UMS makes it easier to be a student&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With UMS, it is easy to be a student, because a long list of relevant school information is easily accessible. E.g., students can see their timetable, homework, grades and attendance records via web and SMS. They can even get notifications on their phone, if there are changes to their timetable or other important information. This makes it easy to stay up-to-date and it strengthens the students’ affiliation to the school.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Possibilities with UMS ==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Identity management.&#039;&#039;&#039; UMS automatically creates, maintains and deletes users in Active Directory, Office 365, Google Apps and many other systems, based on data from the student administration system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Cloud integration.&#039;&#039;&#039; UMS easily integrates with Office 365, SharePoint, Google Apps, Sites and Drives. Timetable data automatically synchronizes to Outlook / Google Calendar. We have also developed a learning portal to Office 365 SharePoint.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;LMS integration.&#039;&#039;&#039; UMS automatically creates class and group rooms in Canvas, Fronter, Moodle, SharePoint etc. Additionally, we integrate to a long list of other systems, e.g. library systems, print payment systems and cafeteria systems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Self-service portal.&#039;&#039;&#039; UMS gives you a single login portal, where users can register attendance, reset passwords, block internet access, create guest users, send SMS, see attendance records and much more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SMS and communication.&#039;&#039;&#039; The best way to reach your students is through their phones. With UMS, the students can automatically receive an SMS when there are changes to their timetable, they can reset their own password, receive their timetable and grades and much more via SMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;App.&#039;&#039;&#039; With UMS, your school can get its own smartphone app, designed with the school’s colours and logo. The app gives students access to their timetable, homework, student ID, attendance records, news from the school etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you need support, we are here to help you. Contact us on our support phone: &#039;&#039;&#039;+45 42408815&#039;&#039;&#039; Monday to Friday from 08.30 am to 03.30 pm. Outside of our opening hours you can send us an e-mail at [mailto:support@inlogic.dk support@inlogic.dk]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Get remote support with [http://downloads.inlogic.dk/TeamViewerQS_da-idcbvgwhct.exe TeamViewer]. With TeamViewer you can get remote support to solve issues, while you are watching. All it requires is that you give us access to your computer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Download [http://downloads.inlogic.dk/Setup.zip UMS]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Download [http://downloads.inlogic.dk/UMSFrontendSetup.zip UMS Academic Web]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Read our [http://www.inlogic.dk/ums-changelog/ changelog] for the lastest changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For other useful tools go to [http://www.inlogic.dk/en/support/download-ums/ inLogic&#039;s download site]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Manuals ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[InLogic Modem|inLogic Modem]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Foxbox|Foxbox SMS Modem]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[UMS License Install]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[UMS update guide|UMS Update Guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== App ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[App]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Attendance Registration]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[App#Student ID And Employee ID|Employee ID]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[My Information]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Parking]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[App#Student ID And Employee ID|Student ID]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[UMS Homework]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[UMS Links]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Vouchers]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Attendance ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Absence Registration for Employees]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Attendance Registration]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Attendance Registration Advanced]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Attendance Registration Card System]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Backend ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[AD Attributes]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Configurator]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Exchange Reviewer]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Exchange Timetable Blocks]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File Server Move]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[GetStudents]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Password Expiration Alert]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Powersave]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[SLI]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[STIL UNI Login]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Integrations ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Axpoint]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[BOSS]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Reindex]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Casepoint|Casepoint]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[DAM]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[edCom]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Elbek &amp;amp; Vejrup Fagsystem]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Integra]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Intranote]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Lectio Sync]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Google Apps]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Moodle]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Papercut]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Print Payment and Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Pure]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Safeticket]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[SLS]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Study Quiz]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[TimeEdit]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[UCFMD]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[UMS Web Service]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[SSO/AD FS]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Tabulex]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== LMS ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Canvas Integration]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[ELEARNINGFORCE SharePoint LMS]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fronter Integration]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Moodle]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Wizdom integration]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Office 365 ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Office 365]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[OneNote Class Notebook]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[MSGraphPermissions|Microsoft Graph Permissions]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Sharepoint Portal]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Self Service ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Exam Handling]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Grades]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[IT Rules]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Merge Letters]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Multiple Users]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Password Self Service]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Password Change]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[SSO]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[UMS Homework]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[UMS Links]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[UMS Photo]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[UMS Web]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[UMS Welcome]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[User Lock]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Web Timetable]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SMS ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[SMS Alert]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[SMS Subscriptions]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[SMS Timetable]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmh</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=Welcome_to_UMS_Wiki&amp;diff=1351</id>
		<title>Welcome to UMS Wiki</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=Welcome_to_UMS_Wiki&amp;diff=1351"/>
		<updated>2018-05-25T11:04:46Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmh: /* Manuals */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:UMS-Web-og-app-400.png|thumb|340x340px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Welcome to UMS Wiki. This wiki contains technical information about UMS. UMS is developed to help the school’s IT-department avoid trivial and hour-long administration tasks. UMS is short for User Management System and it is a system&lt;br /&gt;
developed especially for the educational sector. UMS is a standard solution, which makes it easy to update and maintain, however, because UMS is built using optional modules, it can be tailored to your school’s individual needs. That way you get a simple and effective solution containing everything you need – nothing more, nothing less.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Are you seeking general information please visit our [http://www.inlogic.dk/en/ inLogic website www.inlogic.dk]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What is UMS? ==&lt;br /&gt;
Watch our [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=MI2Wh8ic2hk video] and find out more. UMS is developed to help the school’s IT-department avoid trivial and hour-long administration tasks. However, the school’s teachers and students will benefit from it too, via web and app. Want to know how? Find out in the text below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;UMS reduces the IT-department’s workload&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With UMS, manual user creation is a thing of the past. UMS automatically creates and maintains users in Active Directory, Google Apps, Office 365 and learning management systems, based on data from the student administration system. UMS also gives the school’s students and staff access to a self-service portal, where they can reset their own password, thus saving time for the IT-department.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;UMS gives teachers more time to teach&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Many teachers find themselves with a multitude of administrative tasks they need do to, in addition to their other tasks. This could ultimately reduce the amount time they have to teach. To avoid that, UMS makes it possible to complete the administrative tasks quickly and easily via the UMS self-service portal, app and SMS modules, thus giving teachers more time to teach.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;UMS makes it easier to be a student&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With UMS, it is easy to be a student, because a long list of relevant school information is easily accessible. E.g., students can see their timetable, homework, grades and attendance records via web and SMS. They can even get notifications on their phone, if there are changes to their timetable or other important information. This makes it easy to stay up-to-date and it strengthens the students’ affiliation to the school.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Possibilities with UMS ==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Identity management.&#039;&#039;&#039; UMS automatically creates, maintains and deletes users in Active Directory, Office 365, Google Apps and many other systems, based on data from the student administration system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Cloud integration.&#039;&#039;&#039; UMS easily integrates with Office 365, SharePoint, Google Apps, Sites and Drives. Timetable data automatically synchronizes to Outlook / Google Calendar. We have also developed a learning portal to Office 365 SharePoint.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;LMS integration.&#039;&#039;&#039; UMS automatically creates class and group rooms in Canvas, Fronter, Moodle, SharePoint etc. Additionally, we integrate to a long list of other systems, e.g. library systems, print payment systems and cafeteria systems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Self-service portal.&#039;&#039;&#039; UMS gives you a single login portal, where users can register attendance, reset passwords, block internet access, create guest users, send SMS, see attendance records and much more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SMS and communication.&#039;&#039;&#039; The best way to reach your students is through their phones. With UMS, the students can automatically receive an SMS when there are changes to their timetable, they can reset their own password, receive their timetable and grades and much more via SMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;App.&#039;&#039;&#039; With UMS, your school can get its own smartphone app, designed with the school’s colours and logo. The app gives students access to their timetable, homework, student ID, attendance records, news from the school etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you need support, we are here to help you. Contact us on our support phone: &#039;&#039;&#039;+45 42408815&#039;&#039;&#039; Monday to Friday from 08.30 am to 03.30 pm. Outside of our opening hours you can send us an e-mail at [mailto:support@inlogic.dk support@inlogic.dk]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Get remote support with [http://downloads.inlogic.dk/TeamViewerQS_da-idcbvgwhct.exe TeamViewer]. With TeamViewer you can get remote support to solve issues, while you are watching. All it requires is that you give us access to your computer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Download [http://downloads.inlogic.dk/Setup.zip UMS]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Download [http://downloads.inlogic.dk/UMSFrontendSetup.zip UMS Academic Web]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Read our [http://www.inlogic.dk/ums-changelog/ changelog] for the lastest changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For other useful tools go to [http://www.inlogic.dk/en/support/download-ums/ inLogic&#039;s download site]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Manuals ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[InLogic Modem|inLogic SMS Modem]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Foxbox|Foxbox SMS Modem]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[UMS License Install]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[UMS update guide|UMS Update Guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== App ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[App]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Attendance Registration]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[App#Student ID And Employee ID|Employee ID]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[My Information]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Parking]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[App#Student ID And Employee ID|Student ID]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[UMS Homework]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[UMS Links]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Vouchers]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Attendance ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Absence Registration for Employees]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Attendance Registration]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Attendance Registration Advanced]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Attendance Registration Card System]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Backend ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[AD Attributes]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Configurator]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Exchange Reviewer]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Exchange Timetable Blocks]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File Server Move]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[GetStudents]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Password Expiration Alert]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Powersave]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[SLI]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[STIL UNI Login]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Integrations ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Axpoint]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[BOSS]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Reindex]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Casepoint|Casepoint]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[DAM]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[edCom]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Elbek &amp;amp; Vejrup Fagsystem]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Integra]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Intranote]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Lectio Sync]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Google Apps]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Moodle]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Papercut]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Print Payment and Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Pure]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Safeticket]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[SLS]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Study Quiz]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[TimeEdit]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[UCFMD]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[UMS Web Service]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[SSO/AD FS]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Tabulex]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== LMS ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Canvas Integration]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[ELEARNINGFORCE SharePoint LMS]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fronter Integration]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Moodle]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Wizdom integration]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Office 365 ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Office 365]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[OneNote Class Notebook]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[MSGraphPermissions|Microsoft Graph Permissions]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Sharepoint Portal]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Self Service ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Exam Handling]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Grades]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[IT Rules]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Merge Letters]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Multiple Users]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Password Self Service]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Password Change]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[SSO]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[UMS Homework]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[UMS Links]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[UMS Photo]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[UMS Web]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[UMS Welcome]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[User Lock]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Web Timetable]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SMS ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[SMS Alert]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[SMS Subscriptions]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[SMS Timetable]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmh</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=Welcome_to_UMS_Wiki&amp;diff=1347</id>
		<title>Welcome to UMS Wiki</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=Welcome_to_UMS_Wiki&amp;diff=1347"/>
		<updated>2018-05-25T09:34:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmh: /* Manuals */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:UMS-Web-og-app-400.png|thumb|340x340px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Welcome to UMS Wiki. This wiki contains technical information about UMS. UMS is developed to help the school’s IT-department avoid trivial and hour-long administration tasks. UMS is short for User Management System and it is a system&lt;br /&gt;
developed especially for the educational sector. UMS is a standard solution, which makes it easy to update and maintain, however, because UMS is built using optional modules, it can be tailored to your school’s individual needs. That way you get a simple and effective solution containing everything you need – nothing more, nothing less.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Are you seeking general information please visit our [http://www.inlogic.dk/en/ inLogic website www.inlogic.dk]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What is UMS? ==&lt;br /&gt;
Watch our [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=MI2Wh8ic2hk video] and find out more. UMS is developed to help the school’s IT-department avoid trivial and hour-long administration tasks. However, the school’s teachers and students will benefit from it too, via web and app. Want to know how? Find out in the text below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;UMS reduces the IT-department’s workload&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With UMS, manual user creation is a thing of the past. UMS automatically creates and maintains users in Active Directory, Google Apps, Office 365 and learning management systems, based on data from the student administration system. UMS also gives the school’s students and staff access to a self-service portal, where they can reset their own password, thus saving time for the IT-department.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;UMS gives teachers more time to teach&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Many teachers find themselves with a multitude of administrative tasks they need do to, in addition to their other tasks. This could ultimately reduce the amount time they have to teach. To avoid that, UMS makes it possible to complete the administrative tasks quickly and easily via the UMS self-service portal, app and SMS modules, thus giving teachers more time to teach.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;UMS makes it easier to be a student&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With UMS, it is easy to be a student, because a long list of relevant school information is easily accessible. E.g., students can see their timetable, homework, grades and attendance records via web and SMS. They can even get notifications on their phone, if there are changes to their timetable or other important information. This makes it easy to stay up-to-date and it strengthens the students’ affiliation to the school.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Possibilities with UMS ==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Identity management.&#039;&#039;&#039; UMS automatically creates, maintains and deletes users in Active Directory, Office 365, Google Apps and many other systems, based on data from the student administration system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Cloud integration.&#039;&#039;&#039; UMS easily integrates with Office 365, SharePoint, Google Apps, Sites and Drives. Timetable data automatically synchronizes to Outlook / Google Calendar. We have also developed a learning portal to Office 365 SharePoint.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;LMS integration.&#039;&#039;&#039; UMS automatically creates class and group rooms in Canvas, Fronter, Moodle, SharePoint etc. Additionally, we integrate to a long list of other systems, e.g. library systems, print payment systems and cafeteria systems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Self-service portal.&#039;&#039;&#039; UMS gives you a single login portal, where users can register attendance, reset passwords, block internet access, create guest users, send SMS, see attendance records and much more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SMS and communication.&#039;&#039;&#039; The best way to reach your students is through their phones. With UMS, the students can automatically receive an SMS when there are changes to their timetable, they can reset their own password, receive their timetable and grades and much more via SMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;App.&#039;&#039;&#039; With UMS, your school can get its own smartphone app, designed with the school’s colours and logo. The app gives students access to their timetable, homework, student ID, attendance records, news from the school etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you need support, we are here to help you. Contact us on our support phone: &#039;&#039;&#039;+45 42408815&#039;&#039;&#039; Monday to Friday from 08.30 am to 03.30 pm. Outside of our opening hours you can send us an e-mail at [mailto:support@inlogic.dk support@inlogic.dk]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Get remote support with [http://downloads.inlogic.dk/TeamViewerQS_da-idcbvgwhct.exe TeamViewer]. With TeamViewer you can get remote support to solve issues, while you are watching. All it requires is that you give us access to your computer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Download [http://downloads.inlogic.dk/Setup.zip UMS]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Download [http://downloads.inlogic.dk/UMSFrontendSetup.zip UMS Academic Web]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Read our [http://www.inlogic.dk/ums-changelog/ changelog] for the lastest changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For other useful tools go to [http://www.inlogic.dk/en/support/download-ums/ inLogic&#039;s download site]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Manuals ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[inLogic SMS Modem]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Foxbox|Foxbox SMS Modem]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[UMS License Install]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[UMS update guide|UMS Update Guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== App ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[App]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Attendance Registration]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[App#Student ID And Employee ID|Employee ID]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[My Information]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Parking]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[App#Student ID And Employee ID|Student ID]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[UMS Homework]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[UMS Links]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Vouchers]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Attendance ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Absence Registration for Employees]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Attendance Registration]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Attendance Registration Advanced]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Attendance Registration Card System]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Backend ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[AD Attributes]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Configurator]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Exchange Reviewer]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Exchange Timetable Blocks]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File Server Move]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[GetStudents]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Password Expiration Alert]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Powersave]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[SLI]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[STIL UNI Login]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Integrations ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Axpoint]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[BOSS]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Reindex]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Casepoint|Casepoint]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[DAM]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[edCom]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Elbek &amp;amp; Vejrup Fagsystem]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Integra]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Intranote]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Lectio Sync]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Google Apps]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Moodle]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Papercut]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Print Payment and Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Pure]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Safeticket]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[SLS]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Study Quiz]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[TimeEdit]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[UCFMD]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[UMS Web Service]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[SSO/AD FS]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Tabulex]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== LMS ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Canvas Integration]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[ELEARNINGFORCE SharePoint LMS]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fronter Integration]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Moodle]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Wizdom integration]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Office 365 ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Office 365]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[OneNote Class Notebook]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[MSGraphPermissions|Microsoft Graph Permissions]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Sharepoint Portal]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Self Service ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Exam Handling]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Grades]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[IT Rules]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Merge Letters]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Multiple Users]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Password Self Service]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Password Change]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[SSO]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[UMS Homework]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[UMS Links]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[UMS Photo]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[UMS Web]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[UMS Welcome]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[User Lock]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Web Timetable]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SMS ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[SMS Alert]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[SMS Subscriptions]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[SMS Timetable]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmh</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=InLogic_SMS_Modem&amp;diff=1346</id>
		<title>InLogic SMS Modem</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=InLogic_SMS_Modem&amp;diff=1346"/>
		<updated>2018-05-25T09:33:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmh: Created page with &amp;quot;== Important == &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Certificate is required for use of Modem&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  To be able to send SMS the inLogicModem requires GSM modems with USB interface. We recommend &amp;quot;HUAWEI LTE...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Important ==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Certificate is required for use of Modem&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To be able to send SMS the inLogicModem requires GSM modems with USB interface. We recommend &amp;quot;HUAWEI LTE USB Stick Model: E3372&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Network Port Openings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== TCP port openings from server to modem. ====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Port&lt;br /&gt;
!Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|22&lt;br /&gt;
|SSH access&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|80&lt;br /&gt;
|HTTP access&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|443&lt;br /&gt;
|HTTPS access&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|3306&lt;br /&gt;
|Database access&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== TCP port openings from modem to server. ====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Port&lt;br /&gt;
!Usage&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|80&lt;br /&gt;
|HTTP access&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|443&lt;br /&gt;
|HTTPS access&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Prepare Modem ==&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
![[File:20180516 104258-50%.jpg|none|thumb|800x800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
!Plug-in Modems&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
!&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:20180516 104358-50%.jpg|none|thumb|800x800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;Plug-in Ethernet cable&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Plug-in power cable&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== System Login ==&lt;br /&gt;
Once modem is [[#Prepare Modem|prepared]] and booted, browse to &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://192.168.1.2&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; and click login in upper right corner.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Main Login button.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Login box will popup, and here login with USERNAME: admin and PASSWORD: admin&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Login.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Main Page ==&lt;br /&gt;
After login the system info page appears.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Shows status of the modem.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Main.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Click the [[File:Foxbox menu button.png|frameless|23x23px]] to open menu&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Main with menu.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Network Configuration ==&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Network Config” in menu&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Change IP settings and press “Save Configuration”, [[Inlogicmodem#Reboot|Reboot]] modem on “inLogic Modem Settings” page.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Network Config.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modem Settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Frontend and Hostname Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Hostname ====&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Modem Settings” in the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set Modem Hostname as FQDN.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Scroll down and Click “Save” and the modem will restart.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings Hostname.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Frontend ====&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Modem Settings” in menu&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Change FrontEnd Address to fit your configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Scroll down and Click “Save”&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings Frontend.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Certificate(https) Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Modem Settings” in menu&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;Choose File&amp;quot; and choose pfx certificate from your harddrive/USB stick/other media.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter pfx certificate password in &amp;quot;Certificate Password&amp;quot; box and click &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings Certificate.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== User Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
In the menu click “Modem Settings” and scroll down to “User Settings”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change default admin user password (default “admin”), write new password in Password box just below admin username.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change default sendsms user password (default “sendsms”), write new password in Password box just below sendsms username.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Save” to confirm password change.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings User.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Control Panel ==&lt;br /&gt;
In the menu click &amp;quot;Control Panel&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use Control Panel to see State of SMS Engine, turn on/off SMS Engine.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Control Panel.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SMS ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inbox ===&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Inbox” in menu to see a log of incoming messages.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Inbox.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Outbox ===&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Outbox” in menu to see a log of outgoing messages.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Outbox.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Failed ===&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Failed” in menu to see a log of failed messages.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Failed.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Write New ===&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Write New” in menu to see a log of outgoing messages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;background-color: #FFFF00&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Choose what modem to send from or leave as is to choose first free modem.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;background-color: #00FF00&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Insert mobile phone number to send to. (international prefix is mandatory)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;background-color: #0000FF; color: #FFFFFF&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Write text to send.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click “Send” to continue.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Write New guide.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Time Zone Settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
In the menu click &amp;quot;Time Zone Settings&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Time zone and NTP server settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For External NTP servers check Enable External NTP (default) and choose External NTP Region (Default Europe)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Internal NTP, uncheck Enable External NTP and write comma separated list of NTP servers in Internal NTP textbox.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To set your Time Zone, click Time Zone dropdown and choose your zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click Save to change configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Time Zone Settings.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tools ==&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;Modem Settings&amp;quot; in menu and go to bottom of page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Shell ===&lt;br /&gt;
In browser shell to change advanced settings (&amp;lt;u style=&amp;quot;color:red;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;use with caution&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;)&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings Shell.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Reboot ===&lt;br /&gt;
Reboot modem.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings Reboot.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Root Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
Change of root password requires login to shell. (default root password is &amp;quot;odroid&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Login to shell, run passwd command and follow instructions on screen.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Modem Settings Root.png|none|thumb|1240x1240px]]&lt;br /&gt;
__FORCETOC__&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmh</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=Parking&amp;diff=1326</id>
		<title>Parking</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=Parking&amp;diff=1326"/>
		<updated>2018-05-25T08:19:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmh: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The Parking function makes it easy for users to avoid parking tickets at school. With this module, the school can administer their parking spaces with the parking company. Through the app, students and employees can get a valid, digital parking permit simply by entering their vehicle’s registration number in the app or in UMS Web. When the registration number has been entered, it becomes visible to the parking company. The parking company will then know that the user is allowed to park at the school. Available integration includes Parkzone, APCOA, and City Parkeringssystem.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Prerequisites ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Supported administrative systems ===&lt;br /&gt;
* Parkzone&lt;br /&gt;
* Apcoa&lt;br /&gt;
* City Parkeringssystem&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Module requirements ===&lt;br /&gt;
Parking&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Should third party be contacted ===&lt;br /&gt;
You&#039;ll need a client key (and possibly a password) from the parking company before UMS can communicate with their services.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Installation ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is necessary to have a running UMS installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configuration settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two ways of setting up parking: New Parking and Legacy Parking. In the future, Legacy Parking will be moved to the new system. Currently, new Parking settings are used for City Parkering and Legacy Parking settings are used for ParkZone and Apcoa.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== New Parking Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
In the configurator go to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Modules -&amp;gt; Parking&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ParkingSettingsConfigurator.png|thumb|Parking settings in the configurator|none|490x490px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 3 main parts of the parking system that needs to be set up:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;1. Parking servers&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to set up multiple parking server systems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add, edit, or remove a system.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Parking Servers Settings.png|thumb|The list of parking servers.|none|490x490px]]&lt;br /&gt;
First, choose your parking system (currently only City Parkering is available, but more will be added in future releases).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The description is used as a name or reference in the configurator and is not visible to users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You should have been provided a company key and a password by your parking provider. Enter them in these parking server settings. [[File:Parking server settings.png|thumb|Parking server settings|none|585x585px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;2. Parking places&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can have multiple parking places and you can edit, add, or delete them.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Parking Places.png|thumb|Parking Places|none|490x490px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The parking place description is shown to users that have multiple parking systems to choose from, so make sure that this is a good identifier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When &amp;quot;Delete users&amp;quot; is enabled, users that are removed in UMS will also be deleted from the parking system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When &amp;quot;Cleanup&amp;quot; is enabled, users that exists in the parking system but not UMS will also be deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mail Domain is used only when a parking is created for a user that does not have a private email address entered. If there is a private email address, it will be used. Otherwise, the username concatenated with the Mail Domain will be send. [[File:Parking place seetting edit.png|thumb|Each parking place is connected to a parking system. |none|588x588px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;3. Parking settings&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can set up a parking setting per template, so that one set of users have access to some parking places but not others.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you only have one parking place, and everyone has access to it, you can just create one parking setting.[[File:Parking Settings.png|thumb|You can have multiple parking settings.|none|490x490px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Parking setting setup.png|thumb|A parking setting is a collection of allowed and not allowed parking places.|none|380x380px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can connect a parking setting to a template:&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to edit your template.&lt;br /&gt;
# Find the parking menu and select the parking setting you want for you template.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Parking template.png|thumb|A parking setting is connected to a template.|none|520x520px]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Legacy Parking Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== 1. ParkZone setup ====&lt;br /&gt;
All settings for the Parking module is set in the configurator. Go to Template Editor -&amp;gt; Parkzone -&amp;gt; Manage -&amp;gt; Add&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;Description&#039; - This is the name for your setting, i.e. &#039;Test Plads&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;Client Key settings&#039; - Insert the provided client key from ParkZone. To edit the settings for the client key, click &#039;Manage&#039;. See picture below for illustration.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;Permission group&#039; - Insert the provided parking location ID from ParkZone&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;Delete users&#039; - Check this box if a user should be disabled when removed from AD. If left unchecked, the user will only be disabled if the end date is set to now&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;Cleanup&#039; - Check this box if UMS should synchronise if users are active or deleted&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;Maximum number of license plates&#039; - Set the limit of license plates a user may add&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Parking permissiongroupsettings.png|none|thumb|435x435px|Permission group settings for ParkZone.]]&lt;br /&gt;
The picture below illustrates the settings when managing the client key. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Parkzone clientkeysettings.png|none|thumb|439x439px|Manage client key settings for ParkZone.]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== 2. APCOA setup ====&lt;br /&gt;
All settings for the Parking module is set in the configurator. Go to Template Editor -&amp;gt; APCOA -&amp;gt; Manage -&amp;gt; Add&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;Description&#039; - This is the name for your setting, i.e. &#039;Setup&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;Client key settings&#039; - Insert the provided client key from APCOA. To edit the settings for the client key, click &#039;Manage&#039;. See picture below for illustration.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;Permission group ID&#039; - Insert the provided parking location ID from APCOA&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;Delete users&#039; - Check this box if a user should be disabled when removed from AD. If left unchecked, the user will only be disabled if the end date is set to now&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;Cleanup&#039; - Check this box if UMS should synchronise if users are active or deleted&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;Maximum number of license plates&#039; - Set the limit of license plates a user may add&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;Mail Domain&#039; - User suffix &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Apcoa permissiongroupsettings.png|none|thumb|435x435px|Permission group settings for APCOA.]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The picture below illustrates the settings when managing the client key. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Apcoa clientkeysettings.png|none|thumb|332x332px|Manage client key settings for APCOA.]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== App ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Parking spaces ===&lt;br /&gt;
This view is a list of all parking spaces the school has available (based on your template).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you only have 1 present, that parking space will automatically be selected and this step will be skipped.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Parking Spaces App.png|thumb|First choose your Parking Space.|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Parking registrations ===&lt;br /&gt;
When you have selected a parking space, you will see a list of your registered license plates along with a timestamp of when this was registered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can edit and delete existing registrations, as well as create more, up to the allowed number of registrations the school has specified.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Parking registrations.png|thumb|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:You can add a license plate.png|thumb|You can add a license plate by clicking on the &amp;quot;plus sign&amp;quot; in the top right.|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== General info ===&lt;br /&gt;
The app does not (visually) act differently whether the school is running APCOA, Parkzone or CityParking.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Web interface ==&lt;br /&gt;
To register a license plate with a parking system go to “Your info”.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Your info.png|thumb|Go to your info|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
If a parking system has been installed and you have access to it, you should see a parking menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can then create a new parking, by clicking on the &amp;quot;create new&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Empty parking list.png|thumb|You can see your parking permits.|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
Enter your license plate and select which parking location you want to use. If you only have access to one parking place, you do not have to choose one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you click &#039;ok&#039;, the parking should be registered with the parking system and you should be good to go.[[File:Enter License.png|thumb|Enter your registration number and choose a parking spot.|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
You can always edit or delete your parking.[[File:A created registration.png|thumb|A created registration|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== FAQ ==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmh</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=App&amp;diff=1257</id>
		<title>App</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=App&amp;diff=1257"/>
		<updated>2018-05-15T13:29:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmh: /* Installation */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:UMS School App.png|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
UMS School App is available for iPhone, Android and Windows Phone. It will be designed with the school’s own logo, color and style. The app gives the basic functionality to see:&lt;br /&gt;
*News&lt;br /&gt;
*Timetable&lt;br /&gt;
*Homework&lt;br /&gt;
*Grades&lt;br /&gt;
*User information&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additional licenses gives the ability to create, edit and see more information from various modules. For an overview of module requirement see &amp;quot;[http://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=App&amp;amp;section=6&amp;amp;wteswitched=1#Additional_functionality Additional functionality&amp;quot;]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support ==&lt;br /&gt;
We provide regular support for the following and newer versions:&lt;br /&gt;
* Android version 5.1. We support the same versions as Google provide security updates for. Find an overview [[wikipedia:Android_version_history|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* iOS version 10 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Windows 10 Mobile (version 10)&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that it is possible to run older versions. If support for older versions is needed, we offer support at our hourly rate. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Prerequisites ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Supported administrative systems ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Userinfo: Easy-A, SIS and Lectio (Only mobile number).&lt;br /&gt;
*Grades: Easy-A, Lectio and SIS&lt;br /&gt;
*Homework: Easy-A and SIS.&lt;br /&gt;
*Timetable: Easy-A and SIS&lt;br /&gt;
*Attendance registration: Timetable data is retrieved from Easy-A, SIS, LUDUS, Tabulex and Lectio. Howerver, absence is only registered to Easy-A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Module requirements ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*UMS Web (contains and run all the webservice that is required for the app to receive information and communicate with the server)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Additional functionality ===&lt;br /&gt;
You get more functionality in the app by having the following modules, these are all optional:&lt;br /&gt;
*Attendance Registration: Gives “Your attendance”, which shows student statistics, the student are able to add absence reason and see their absence status in the timetable&lt;br /&gt;
*Attendance Registration for UMS School App: gives employee “attendance registration” and student the ability to &amp;quot;report absence&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*Homework: gives the employee the ability to create homework&lt;br /&gt;
*Link Collection: gives links/bookmarks the school can setup&lt;br /&gt;
*User info: gives “Your information” the ability to edit the information. This also adds the functionality for the user to upload a new profile image (a selfie) to be used in the student id card&lt;br /&gt;
*Student &amp;amp; Employee Id: Gives the students a “student id card” and the employees an “employee id card”. To update their student id card profile image you’ll need the “User info” module&lt;br /&gt;
*Parking: Parkzone &amp;amp; APCOA Integration. Gives the option to create and edit parking permits from Parkzone and APCOA&lt;br /&gt;
*User information (add/edit)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: All Attendance functionality requires Attendance Registration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Testing after setup ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The app will be tested internally at inLogic before release. The test requires access to a user with relevant data. You can either create a fictional student who is associated to a real course, or alternatively use a real student&#039;s account, if the person agrees that the account is being used for a system test of the school&#039;s APP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== What to have ready ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Important&#039;&#039;&#039;: The UMS site needs to use HTTPS and be public available. It needs a valid SSL certificate.&lt;br /&gt;
*Materials that can be used for designing the app. For example: Logo, brochure, design guide line, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Optional: It is possible for the school to have its own account where the app is located. An account in the App Store cost $99 per year, while an account for Google Play costs a onetime fee of $25. The school self-manage these accounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Physical hardware requirements ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Having a smartphone is a necessity, either an Android, iOS or a Windows 10 Mobile.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Should third party be contacted ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the school is using a dedicated hosting service, they have to be informed on how you wish the news feed should be setup.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Installation ==&lt;br /&gt;
inLogic will publish the app either through inLogics account or your schools own account if you have acquired one. If you have your own account inLogic needs to be informed as well. To publish the app, inLogic needs the following information&lt;br /&gt;
* [[UMS Web]] url path - (If you are running any kind of gateway (TMG, UAG etc.) you will need to create rules for the services on UMS Web, contact us for more information)&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;https://*****.dk/&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Styling ==&lt;br /&gt;
To style the app we need the following:&lt;br /&gt;
* Primary color&lt;br /&gt;
* Secondary color&lt;br /&gt;
* Logo (vector file: .psd, .ai etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
* Icon for app logo (vector file: .psd, .ai etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The primary color will mostly be used for all static view. Secondary color will be used when something is active or being activated like a button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Optional:&lt;br /&gt;
* Background image for login (size 1080x1920)&lt;br /&gt;
* Background image for top bar of menu (size 1080x480)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Examples of styling ===&lt;br /&gt;
* Primary and secondary colors&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App - Timetable view.png|none|thumb|Example of primary and secondary colors used in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
The primary color is used in the Header navigation bar, and the secondary color as border on the selected Calendar date&lt;br /&gt;
]]&lt;br /&gt;
* The schools logo - Max. 1024x576&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Logo.png|none|thumb|Example of the inLogic logo used in the Demo app]]  &lt;br /&gt;
* App logo - 1024x1024. If not supplied, inLogic will generate an App logo based on the schools logo&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Simulator Screen Shot - iPhone SE - 2018-05-15 at 12.57.23.png|none|thumb|Example of app logo in use]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Login background image - 1080x1920. If not supplied, a white background will be shown&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App - Login screen.png|none|thumb|Example of a background image used on the Demo app login screen.&lt;br /&gt;
The school logo will be displayed on top of the background image, as seen here&lt;br /&gt;
]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Menu top bar image - 1080x480. If not supplied, a white background will be shown&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App - Sidebar menu.png|none|thumb|Example of an image used on the Demo app menu view]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Technical settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following sections show how to configurate the app. The information only applies to services that is directly connected to the app, i.e. how to set up schedule tasks in the app. The only exception is &#039;UMS RSS Feeds&#039;, which is a specific service for app. If a fully detailed setup guide is needed, please go to that specific module. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some of the configurations are not set up specifically for app, i.e. ParkZone. If you cannot find the setup guide you are looking for, you can find it by searching or on the front page. Please note that some changes made in the configurator not only will affect the app but also UMS Web.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important&#039;&#039;&#039; As many settings only loads once the website is initializing, most changes require an IIS reset on the server. The app retrieves settings from UMS once a day, which means that changes will be visible the next time you log in or the next day.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Menu Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You are able to set the order and which menu buttons should be shown per template for the users&lt;br /&gt;
#Open UMS Configurator&lt;br /&gt;
#Templates -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; select a template -&amp;gt; App&lt;br /&gt;
#Under Menu order select Manage -&amp;gt; Add&lt;br /&gt;
#Write a Description&lt;br /&gt;
#Drap and drop the menu you want&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MeunOrderSettings.png|none|thumb|491x491px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Here three menubuttons will be visible to the users on that specific template.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== News ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This describes how to setup news for the app.&lt;br /&gt;
* App News created from UMS Web&lt;br /&gt;
* Add a RSS feed&lt;br /&gt;
* Add Facebook feed&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to use all three setups together. Combine as you like and set difference feed for difference templates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Setup for App News from UMS Web ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to create or use an existing AD group. This group will have access to create and modify news in&lt;br /&gt;
App News on UMS Web.&lt;br /&gt;
#Open UMS Configurator&lt;br /&gt;
#Menu -&amp;gt; Web Setup -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; App&lt;br /&gt;
#Add the AD group for News Access group&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App newsaccessgroup.png|none|thumb|488x488px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Setup for RSS feed ====&lt;br /&gt;
Add server name for the service for RSS feed in Menu -&amp;gt; Modules -&amp;gt; Settings -&amp;gt; RSS Feeds&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App rssfeedservice.png|thumb|none|496x496px]]&lt;br /&gt;
To setup Rss feed you will need the url for the rss. (E.g. http://inlogic.dk/feed)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Menu -&amp;gt; Templates -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; select template -&amp;gt; Rss Feeds&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Manage -&amp;gt; Add… -&amp;gt; Fill in description, feed url and access token&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App rssfeedurl.png|none|thumb|503x503px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; You only need an access token if the feed is from Facebook&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The RSS feed runs as a service called “UMS RSS Feeds”. Default running every 5 min.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App services.png|none|thumb|510x510px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Restart the service to test it and check the output in /UserManagement/RSSFeeds.Log&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App rssfeedlog.png|none|thumb|511x511px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Setup for Facebook news ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to use a Facebook page news feed, you need two things:&lt;br /&gt;
*Facebook Page Url Feed&lt;br /&gt;
*Access Token&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Facebook Page Url Feed =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create the feed url&lt;br /&gt;
#Get your facebook page url&lt;br /&gt;
#*E.g. https://www.facebook.com/inlogic.dk&lt;br /&gt;
#Copy the name. E.g. “inlogic.dk”&lt;br /&gt;
#*Note: this can also be a number “142642699097242”&lt;br /&gt;
#Replace “inlogic.dk” with your name in this url&lt;br /&gt;
#*https://graph.facebook.com/v2.8/inlogic.dk/&lt;br /&gt;
Your facebook page url feed should look something like this:&lt;br /&gt;
*https://graph.facebook.com/v2.8/schoolname/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is your feed URL. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Create a facebook access token =====&lt;br /&gt;
The personal Facebook account that you use to register as a developer does not need to be associated in any way with the page or group whose posts you want to display. You cannot log in to the Developer site using a Facebook Page or Business account. You must use the username and password from your personal Facebook profile. Facebook doesn’t allow businesses to register as developers, only individuals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please follow [https://developers.facebook.com/docs/apps/register Facebook guide] to enable yourself as developer on facebook.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you have a facebook developer account and created an app go to [https://developers.facebook.com/tools/explorer Facebook Graph Explorer]&lt;br /&gt;
#Select application&lt;br /&gt;
#Select “Get Token” and “Get App Token”&lt;br /&gt;
#Copy the Access Token&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App facebookgettoken.png|none|thumb|532x532px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Now you have the access token you need to paste into the configurator.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App rssfeedurl.png|none|thumb|604x604px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Reload the service UMS Rss Feed in Services and look in the RSS Feed log to validate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Grades ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can set the default view for grades, that filters the grades accordingly. The options are Course, Day and period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Configurator -&amp;gt; Web Setup -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; App -&amp;gt; Default grade view&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App gradesview.png|none|thumb|476x476px]]&lt;br /&gt;
To specific the period you can set how your terms are set with start and end day for each period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Configurator -&amp;gt; Modules -&amp;gt; Grades -&amp;gt; Select the Datasource -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; Terms&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App gradesterms.png|none|thumb|481x481px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on which administration system you’re exporting grades from the columns can vary. You can set which grades column should be used and in which order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Configurator -&amp;gt; Web Setup -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; App -&amp;gt; Select grade columns&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App gradescolumns.png|none|thumb|482x482px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Grades in the app&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The grades view in the App will change accordingly to which columns chosen, a max of 4 columns will be shown in the App. The columns will be shown for each grade in order from 1 to 4.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Your information ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can select which fields in user information that should be editable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Configurator -&amp;gt; Web Setup -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; Userinfo&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App userinfo.png|none|thumb|496x496px]]&lt;br /&gt;
You need to set permission before the users are able to upload their own student photo (a selfie).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Configurator -&amp;gt; Web Setup -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; UMS Photo -&amp;gt; Enable Selfie in App&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App userinfoselfie.png|none|thumb|503x503px]]&lt;br /&gt;
This will enable selfie function.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Student ID And Employee ID ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Student ID uses user information and UMS Photo and has no configuration specific for the app.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make sure Anonymous Authentication is enabled for the folder ‘Webservices’ in Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager for the Default Web Site&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To let the users change their student ID card profile image go to the chapter for [[My Information]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Student ID Barcode ====&lt;br /&gt;
Only students imported from Lectio will have a Card ID set by default. Note that not all card IDs can be displayed in all formats. You can set a default bar code format which the students Card ID will be shown as.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Web tasks -&amp;gt; Web setup -&amp;gt; General settings (scroll to bottom)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the barcode format that your scanners support.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Available barcode formats.png|thumb|318x318px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== My Absence ===&lt;br /&gt;
----The students are able to write an absence reason on an already registered subject. This can be enabled in the template editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the template -&amp;gt; Absence -&amp;gt; Manage -&amp;gt; Create a new settings or select an existing one -&amp;gt; Add/Edit&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Check &amp;quot;Allow students to register absence reason&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Absence settings.png|none|thumb|435x435px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Allow students to register absence reason&#039;&#039;&#039; will allow the students to set an absence reason when a teacher has set the student as absent. The student can set an absence reason in &amp;quot;My absence&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Days back&#039;&#039;&#039; is the number of days back the students are allowed to set an absence reason.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Show Course&#039;&#039;&#039; will show the course view (this will effect both web and app).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Show Activity&#039;&#039;&#039; will show the activity view (this will effect both web and app).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Push Notification ===&lt;br /&gt;
----UMS can send push notifications when there are news, grades, or changes in your timetable. It is possible to receive a daily notification with your timetable for the day.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition the app can receive [[SMS Alert]] messages. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To set up push notifications go to Web Setup -&amp;gt; App -&amp;gt; Manage -&amp;gt; Add&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AppPushNotificationSettings.png|none|thumb|383x383px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set the description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
FCM Server Api Key:&lt;br /&gt;
# Receive the key string from inLogic and paste it&lt;br /&gt;
Windows Phone:&lt;br /&gt;
# Receive the Package SID and Client secret from inLogic and paste the strings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== School account ====&lt;br /&gt;
In case the school has it&#039;s own account do the following to retrieve the information&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
FCM Server Api Key:&lt;br /&gt;
# Open https://play.google.com/apps/publish&lt;br /&gt;
# Google Play Console -&amp;gt; Settings -&amp;gt; API Access -&amp;gt; Create linked project and open it -&amp;gt; Credentials&lt;br /&gt;
# Create API Key&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the API Key and make key restriction for Android&lt;br /&gt;
# Type in your package name and SHA-1 certificate fingerprint&lt;br /&gt;
# Copy the API key and paste it inside FCM Server API Key&lt;br /&gt;
Windows Phone:&lt;br /&gt;
# Open https://developer.microsoft.com/en-us/dashboard/apps/overview&lt;br /&gt;
# Select your app&lt;br /&gt;
# Services -&amp;gt; Push notification -&amp;gt; WNS/MPNS&lt;br /&gt;
# Select &amp;quot;Live Services site&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Copy and paste the Package SID into the configurator&lt;br /&gt;
# Generate an Application Secret if none exist&lt;br /&gt;
# Copy and paste the Application Secret into the configurator (This is the Client Secret)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Links ===&lt;br /&gt;
----[[UMS Links]] can be used by both UMS Web and UMS App. Check the [[UMS Links|guide]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Homework ===&lt;br /&gt;
----See [[UMS Homework]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Parking ===&lt;br /&gt;
----See [[Parking]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Notify absence ===&lt;br /&gt;
----See [[Attendance Registration#SMS and App settings for notify absence|App settings for notify absence in attendance registration]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sms Alert ===&lt;br /&gt;
----See [[SMS Alert]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== FAQ ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Untrusted Certificate Error on Android ===&lt;br /&gt;
Can&#039;t login on older Android mobile running a version between 4.1 and 5.1? This could be due to an untrusted Comodo SSL Certificate. We were able to reproduced it on Android version 4.1, 4.4.2 and 5.0.1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can test your SSL certificate on https://sslanalyzer.comodoca.com/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do the following on the server&lt;br /&gt;
# Delete the Comodo RSA Certification Authority issued by Comodo RSA Certification Authority with an expiration date of January 18, 2038.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enable automatic root certificate updates on the server&lt;br /&gt;
Please checkout the Comodo support site: https://support.comodo.com/index.php?/Knowledgebase/Article/View/1019/38/untrusted-certificate-error-on-android&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For future conservation:&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;Certificate is not installed correctly; the certificate needs to be chained back to the Addtrust root certificate in order to be trusted on the Android.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;The issue is that the Windows server is not presenting the complete certificate chain; clients which do not have the complete certificate chain will result in this error as encountered on the Android phone. In order to resolve this, on the server which this certificate is installed on, please open the MMC (Microsoft Management Console), and add the certificate snap-in for the computer account on the local computer.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;In the Intermediate Certification Authorities folder, verify if the Comodo RSA Domain Validation Secure Server CA and Comodo RSA Certification Authority(issued to Comodo RSA Certification Authority, issued by AddTrustExternal CA Root) are installed in this certificate store.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;In the Trusted Root Certification Authorities folder verify if the AddTrustExternal CA Root is installed.  Also, if you see the Comodo RSA Certification Authority (issued to and issued by Comodo RSA Certification Authority with an expiration date of January 18, 2038) is present, if it is please delete this certificate.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;If any of these certificates are missing  the intermediate and root certificates were provided to you in the .zip file when the certificate was issued, or are available via this support article - &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;https://support.comodo.com/index.php?/Default/Knowledgebase/Article/View/979/108/domain-validation-sha-2&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; .&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;If you had to delete the Comodo RSA Certification Authority from the Trusted Root Authorities folder, you will also need to disable automatic root certificate updates on the server - https://support.comodo.com/index.php?/Default/Knowledgebase/Article/View/769/17/turn-off-automatic-root-certificates-updates-server-2008&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;If you have performed these steps and the certificate chain has not updated on the server, to force IIS to update the certificate chain you will need to either change the certificate binding in IIS to another certificate, and then switch the certificate bindings to the correct certificate. Alternately, you will need to restart the server.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;Conservation for https://support.comodo.com/index.php?/Default/Knowledgebase/Article/View/769/17/turn-off-automatic-root-certificates-updates-server-2008&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;To perform this procedure, you must be a member of the local Administrators group, or you must have been delegated the appropriate authority.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;To turn off Automatic Root Certificates Update:&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;1. Click Start, and then click Run.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;2. Type gpedit.msc, and then click OK.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;3. If the User Account Control dialog box appears, confirm that the action it displays is what you want, and then click Continue.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;4. Double-click Administrative Templates, double-click System, double-click Internet Communication Management, and then click Internet Communication settings.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;5. Double-click Turn off Automatic Root Certificates Update, click Enabled, and then click OK.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;6. Close the Local Group Policy Editor.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;Note: You can use Group Policy to set policy settings that apply across a given site, domain, or organizational unit in Active Directory Domain Services.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmh</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=App&amp;diff=1256</id>
		<title>App</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=App&amp;diff=1256"/>
		<updated>2018-05-15T13:25:53Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmh: /* Styling */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:UMS School App.png|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
UMS School App is available for iPhone, Android and Windows Phone. It will be designed with the school’s own logo, color and style. The app gives the basic functionality to see:&lt;br /&gt;
*News&lt;br /&gt;
*Timetable&lt;br /&gt;
*Homework&lt;br /&gt;
*Grades&lt;br /&gt;
*User information&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additional licenses gives the ability to create, edit and see more information from various modules. For an overview of module requirement see &amp;quot;[http://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=App&amp;amp;section=6&amp;amp;wteswitched=1#Additional_functionality Additional functionality&amp;quot;]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support ==&lt;br /&gt;
We provide regular support for the following and newer versions:&lt;br /&gt;
* Android version 5.1. We support the same versions as Google provide security updates for. Find an overview [[wikipedia:Android_version_history|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* iOS version 10 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Windows 10 Mobile (version 10)&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that it is possible to run older versions. If support for older versions is needed, we offer support at our hourly rate. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Prerequisites ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Supported administrative systems ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Userinfo: Easy-A, SIS and Lectio (Only mobile number).&lt;br /&gt;
*Grades: Easy-A, Lectio and SIS&lt;br /&gt;
*Homework: Easy-A and SIS.&lt;br /&gt;
*Timetable: Easy-A and SIS&lt;br /&gt;
*Attendance registration: Timetable data is retrieved from Easy-A, SIS, LUDUS, Tabulex and Lectio. Howerver, absence is only registered to Easy-A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Module requirements ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*UMS Web (contains and run all the webservice that is required for the app to receive information and communicate with the server)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Additional functionality ===&lt;br /&gt;
You get more functionality in the app by having the following modules, these are all optional:&lt;br /&gt;
*Attendance Registration: Gives “Your attendance”, which shows student statistics, the student are able to add absence reason and see their absence status in the timetable&lt;br /&gt;
*Attendance Registration for UMS School App: gives employee “attendance registration” and student the ability to &amp;quot;report absence&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*Homework: gives the employee the ability to create homework&lt;br /&gt;
*Link Collection: gives links/bookmarks the school can setup&lt;br /&gt;
*User info: gives “Your information” the ability to edit the information. This also adds the functionality for the user to upload a new profile image (a selfie) to be used in the student id card&lt;br /&gt;
*Student &amp;amp; Employee Id: Gives the students a “student id card” and the employees an “employee id card”. To update their student id card profile image you’ll need the “User info” module&lt;br /&gt;
*Parking: Parkzone &amp;amp; APCOA Integration. Gives the option to create and edit parking permits from Parkzone and APCOA&lt;br /&gt;
*User information (add/edit)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: All Attendance functionality requires Attendance Registration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Testing after setup ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The app will be tested internally at inLogic before release. The test requires access to a user with relevant data. You can either create a fictional student who is associated to a real course, or alternatively use a real student&#039;s account, if the person agrees that the account is being used for a system test of the school&#039;s APP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== What to have ready ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Important&#039;&#039;&#039;: The UMS site needs to use HTTPS and be public available. It needs a valid SSL certificate.&lt;br /&gt;
*Materials that can be used for designing the app. For example: Logo, brochure, design guide line, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Optional: It is possible for the school to have its own account where the app is located. An account in the App Store cost $99 per year, while an account for Google Play costs a onetime fee of $25. The school self-manage these accounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Physical hardware requirements ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Having a smartphone is a necessity, either an Android, iOS or a Windows 10 Mobile.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Should third party be contacted ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the school is using a dedicated hosting service, they have to be informed on how you wish the news feed should be setup.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Styling ==&lt;br /&gt;
To style the app we need the following:&lt;br /&gt;
* Primary color&lt;br /&gt;
* Secondary color&lt;br /&gt;
* Logo (vector file: .psd, .ai etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
* Icon (vector file: .psd, .ai etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The primary color will mostly be used for all static view. Secondary color will be used when something is active or being activated like a button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Optional:&lt;br /&gt;
* Background image for login (size 1080x1920)&lt;br /&gt;
* Background image for top bar of menu (size 1080x480)&lt;br /&gt;
== Installation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
inLogic will publish the app either through inLogics account or your schools own account if you have acquired one. If you have your own account inLogic needs to be informed as well. To publish the app, inLogic needs the following information&lt;br /&gt;
* [[UMS Web]] url path - (If you are running any kind of gateway (TMG, UAG etc.) you will need to create rules for the services on UMS Web, contact us for more information)&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;https://*****.dk/&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* The schools logo - (Max. 1024x576)&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Logo.png|none|thumb|Example of the inLogic logo used in the Demo app]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Primary and secondary colors&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App - Timetable view.png|none|thumb|Example of primary and secondary colors used in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
The primary color is used in the Header navigation bar, and the secondary color as border on the selected Calendar date&lt;br /&gt;
]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Optional resources ===&lt;br /&gt;
* App logo - (1024x1024)&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Simulator Screen Shot - iPhone SE - 2018-05-15 at 12.57.23.png|none|thumb|Example of app logo in use]]&lt;br /&gt;
If not supplied, inLogic will generate an App logo based on the schools logo&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Login background image - (1080x1920)&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App - Login screen.png|none|thumb|Example of a background image used on the Demo app login screen.&lt;br /&gt;
The school logo will be displayed on top of the background image, as seen here&lt;br /&gt;
]]&lt;br /&gt;
If not supplied, a white background will be shown&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Menu top bar image - (1080x480)&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App - Sidebar menu.png|none|thumb|Example of an image used on the Demo app menu view]]&lt;br /&gt;
If not supplied, a white background will be shown&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Technical settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following sections show how to configurate the app. The information only applies to services that is directly connected to the app, i.e. how to set up schedule tasks in the app. The only exception is &#039;UMS RSS Feeds&#039;, which is a specific service for app. If a fully detailed setup guide is needed, please go to that specific module. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some of the configurations are not set up specifically for app, i.e. ParkZone. If you cannot find the setup guide you are looking for, you can find it by searching or on the front page. Please note that some changes made in the configurator not only will affect the app but also UMS Web.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important&#039;&#039;&#039; As many settings only loads once the website is initializing, most changes require an IIS reset on the server. The app retrieves settings from UMS once a day, which means that changes will be visible the next time you log in or the next day.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Menu Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You are able to set the order and which menu buttons should be shown per template for the users&lt;br /&gt;
#Open UMS Configurator&lt;br /&gt;
#Templates -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; select a template -&amp;gt; App&lt;br /&gt;
#Under Menu order select Manage -&amp;gt; Add&lt;br /&gt;
#Write a Description&lt;br /&gt;
#Drap and drop the menu you want&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MeunOrderSettings.png|none|thumb|491x491px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Here three menubuttons will be visible to the users on that specific template.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== News ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This describes how to setup news for the app.&lt;br /&gt;
* App News created from UMS Web&lt;br /&gt;
* Add a RSS feed&lt;br /&gt;
* Add Facebook feed&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to use all three setups together. Combine as you like and set difference feed for difference templates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Setup for App News from UMS Web ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to create or use an existing AD group. This group will have access to create and modify news in&lt;br /&gt;
App News on UMS Web.&lt;br /&gt;
#Open UMS Configurator&lt;br /&gt;
#Menu -&amp;gt; Web Setup -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; App&lt;br /&gt;
#Add the AD group for News Access group&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App newsaccessgroup.png|none|thumb|488x488px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Setup for RSS feed ====&lt;br /&gt;
Add server name for the service for RSS feed in Menu -&amp;gt; Modules -&amp;gt; Settings -&amp;gt; RSS Feeds&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App rssfeedservice.png|thumb|none|496x496px]]&lt;br /&gt;
To setup Rss feed you will need the url for the rss. (E.g. http://inlogic.dk/feed)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Menu -&amp;gt; Templates -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; select template -&amp;gt; Rss Feeds&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Manage -&amp;gt; Add… -&amp;gt; Fill in description, feed url and access token&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App rssfeedurl.png|none|thumb|503x503px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; You only need an access token if the feed is from Facebook&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The RSS feed runs as a service called “UMS RSS Feeds”. Default running every 5 min.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App services.png|none|thumb|510x510px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Restart the service to test it and check the output in /UserManagement/RSSFeeds.Log&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App rssfeedlog.png|none|thumb|511x511px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Setup for Facebook news ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to use a Facebook page news feed, you need two things:&lt;br /&gt;
*Facebook Page Url Feed&lt;br /&gt;
*Access Token&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Facebook Page Url Feed =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create the feed url&lt;br /&gt;
#Get your facebook page url&lt;br /&gt;
#*E.g. https://www.facebook.com/inlogic.dk&lt;br /&gt;
#Copy the name. E.g. “inlogic.dk”&lt;br /&gt;
#*Note: this can also be a number “142642699097242”&lt;br /&gt;
#Replace “inlogic.dk” with your name in this url&lt;br /&gt;
#*https://graph.facebook.com/v2.8/inlogic.dk/&lt;br /&gt;
Your facebook page url feed should look something like this:&lt;br /&gt;
*https://graph.facebook.com/v2.8/schoolname/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is your feed URL. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Create a facebook access token =====&lt;br /&gt;
The personal Facebook account that you use to register as a developer does not need to be associated in any way with the page or group whose posts you want to display. You cannot log in to the Developer site using a Facebook Page or Business account. You must use the username and password from your personal Facebook profile. Facebook doesn’t allow businesses to register as developers, only individuals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please follow [https://developers.facebook.com/docs/apps/register Facebook guide] to enable yourself as developer on facebook.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you have a facebook developer account and created an app go to [https://developers.facebook.com/tools/explorer Facebook Graph Explorer]&lt;br /&gt;
#Select application&lt;br /&gt;
#Select “Get Token” and “Get App Token”&lt;br /&gt;
#Copy the Access Token&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App facebookgettoken.png|none|thumb|532x532px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Now you have the access token you need to paste into the configurator.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App rssfeedurl.png|none|thumb|604x604px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Reload the service UMS Rss Feed in Services and look in the RSS Feed log to validate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Grades ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can set the default view for grades, that filters the grades accordingly. The options are Course, Day and period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Configurator -&amp;gt; Web Setup -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; App -&amp;gt; Default grade view&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App gradesview.png|none|thumb|476x476px]]&lt;br /&gt;
To specific the period you can set how your terms are set with start and end day for each period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Configurator -&amp;gt; Modules -&amp;gt; Grades -&amp;gt; Select the Datasource -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; Terms&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App gradesterms.png|none|thumb|481x481px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on which administration system you’re exporting grades from the columns can vary. You can set which grades column should be used and in which order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Configurator -&amp;gt; Web Setup -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; App -&amp;gt; Select grade columns&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App gradescolumns.png|none|thumb|482x482px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Grades in the app&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The grades view in the App will change accordingly to which columns chosen, a max of 4 columns will be shown in the App. The columns will be shown for each grade in order from 1 to 4.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Your information ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can select which fields in user information that should be editable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Configurator -&amp;gt; Web Setup -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; Userinfo&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App userinfo.png|none|thumb|496x496px]]&lt;br /&gt;
You need to set permission before the users are able to upload their own student photo (a selfie).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Configurator -&amp;gt; Web Setup -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; UMS Photo -&amp;gt; Enable Selfie in App&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App userinfoselfie.png|none|thumb|503x503px]]&lt;br /&gt;
This will enable selfie function.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Student ID And Employee ID ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Student ID uses user information and UMS Photo and has no configuration specific for the app.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make sure Anonymous Authentication is enabled for the folder ‘Webservices’ in Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager for the Default Web Site&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To let the users change their student ID card profile image go to the chapter for [[My Information]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Student ID Barcode ====&lt;br /&gt;
Only students imported from Lectio will have a Card ID set by default. Note that not all card IDs can be displayed in all formats. You can set a default bar code format which the students Card ID will be shown as.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Web tasks -&amp;gt; Web setup -&amp;gt; General settings (scroll to bottom)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the barcode format that your scanners support.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Available barcode formats.png|thumb|318x318px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== My Absence ===&lt;br /&gt;
----The students are able to write an absence reason on an already registered subject. This can be enabled in the template editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the template -&amp;gt; Absence -&amp;gt; Manage -&amp;gt; Create a new settings or select an existing one -&amp;gt; Add/Edit&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Check &amp;quot;Allow students to register absence reason&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Absence settings.png|none|thumb|435x435px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Allow students to register absence reason&#039;&#039;&#039; will allow the students to set an absence reason when a teacher has set the student as absent. The student can set an absence reason in &amp;quot;My absence&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Days back&#039;&#039;&#039; is the number of days back the students are allowed to set an absence reason.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Show Course&#039;&#039;&#039; will show the course view (this will effect both web and app).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Show Activity&#039;&#039;&#039; will show the activity view (this will effect both web and app).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Push Notification ===&lt;br /&gt;
----UMS can send push notifications when there are news, grades, or changes in your timetable. It is possible to receive a daily notification with your timetable for the day.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition the app can receive [[SMS Alert]] messages. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To set up push notifications go to Web Setup -&amp;gt; App -&amp;gt; Manage -&amp;gt; Add&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AppPushNotificationSettings.png|none|thumb|383x383px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set the description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
FCM Server Api Key:&lt;br /&gt;
# Receive the key string from inLogic and paste it&lt;br /&gt;
Windows Phone:&lt;br /&gt;
# Receive the Package SID and Client secret from inLogic and paste the strings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== School account ====&lt;br /&gt;
In case the school has it&#039;s own account do the following to retrieve the information&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
FCM Server Api Key:&lt;br /&gt;
# Open https://play.google.com/apps/publish&lt;br /&gt;
# Google Play Console -&amp;gt; Settings -&amp;gt; API Access -&amp;gt; Create linked project and open it -&amp;gt; Credentials&lt;br /&gt;
# Create API Key&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the API Key and make key restriction for Android&lt;br /&gt;
# Type in your package name and SHA-1 certificate fingerprint&lt;br /&gt;
# Copy the API key and paste it inside FCM Server API Key&lt;br /&gt;
Windows Phone:&lt;br /&gt;
# Open https://developer.microsoft.com/en-us/dashboard/apps/overview&lt;br /&gt;
# Select your app&lt;br /&gt;
# Services -&amp;gt; Push notification -&amp;gt; WNS/MPNS&lt;br /&gt;
# Select &amp;quot;Live Services site&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Copy and paste the Package SID into the configurator&lt;br /&gt;
# Generate an Application Secret if none exist&lt;br /&gt;
# Copy and paste the Application Secret into the configurator (This is the Client Secret)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Links ===&lt;br /&gt;
----[[UMS Links]] can be used by both UMS Web and UMS App. Check the [[UMS Links|guide]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Homework ===&lt;br /&gt;
----See [[UMS Homework]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Parking ===&lt;br /&gt;
----See [[Parking]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Notify absence ===&lt;br /&gt;
----See [[Attendance Registration#SMS and App settings for notify absence|App settings for notify absence in attendance registration]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sms Alert ===&lt;br /&gt;
----See [[SMS Alert]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== FAQ ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Untrusted Certificate Error on Android ===&lt;br /&gt;
Can&#039;t login on older Android mobile running a version between 4.1 and 5.1? This could be due to an untrusted Comodo SSL Certificate. We were able to reproduced it on Android version 4.1, 4.4.2 and 5.0.1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can test your SSL certificate on https://sslanalyzer.comodoca.com/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do the following on the server&lt;br /&gt;
# Delete the Comodo RSA Certification Authority issued by Comodo RSA Certification Authority with an expiration date of January 18, 2038.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enable automatic root certificate updates on the server&lt;br /&gt;
Please checkout the Comodo support site: https://support.comodo.com/index.php?/Knowledgebase/Article/View/1019/38/untrusted-certificate-error-on-android&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For future conservation:&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;Certificate is not installed correctly; the certificate needs to be chained back to the Addtrust root certificate in order to be trusted on the Android.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;The issue is that the Windows server is not presenting the complete certificate chain; clients which do not have the complete certificate chain will result in this error as encountered on the Android phone. In order to resolve this, on the server which this certificate is installed on, please open the MMC (Microsoft Management Console), and add the certificate snap-in for the computer account on the local computer.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;In the Intermediate Certification Authorities folder, verify if the Comodo RSA Domain Validation Secure Server CA and Comodo RSA Certification Authority(issued to Comodo RSA Certification Authority, issued by AddTrustExternal CA Root) are installed in this certificate store.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;In the Trusted Root Certification Authorities folder verify if the AddTrustExternal CA Root is installed.  Also, if you see the Comodo RSA Certification Authority (issued to and issued by Comodo RSA Certification Authority with an expiration date of January 18, 2038) is present, if it is please delete this certificate.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;If any of these certificates are missing  the intermediate and root certificates were provided to you in the .zip file when the certificate was issued, or are available via this support article - &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;https://support.comodo.com/index.php?/Default/Knowledgebase/Article/View/979/108/domain-validation-sha-2&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; .&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;If you had to delete the Comodo RSA Certification Authority from the Trusted Root Authorities folder, you will also need to disable automatic root certificate updates on the server - https://support.comodo.com/index.php?/Default/Knowledgebase/Article/View/769/17/turn-off-automatic-root-certificates-updates-server-2008&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;If you have performed these steps and the certificate chain has not updated on the server, to force IIS to update the certificate chain you will need to either change the certificate binding in IIS to another certificate, and then switch the certificate bindings to the correct certificate. Alternately, you will need to restart the server.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;Conservation for https://support.comodo.com/index.php?/Default/Knowledgebase/Article/View/769/17/turn-off-automatic-root-certificates-updates-server-2008&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;To perform this procedure, you must be a member of the local Administrators group, or you must have been delegated the appropriate authority.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;To turn off Automatic Root Certificates Update:&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;1. Click Start, and then click Run.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;2. Type gpedit.msc, and then click OK.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;3. If the User Account Control dialog box appears, confirm that the action it displays is what you want, and then click Continue.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;4. Double-click Administrative Templates, double-click System, double-click Internet Communication Management, and then click Internet Communication settings.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;5. Double-click Turn off Automatic Root Certificates Update, click Enabled, and then click OK.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;6. Close the Local Group Policy Editor.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;Note: You can use Group Policy to set policy settings that apply across a given site, domain, or organizational unit in Active Directory Domain Services.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmh</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=App&amp;diff=1249</id>
		<title>App</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=App&amp;diff=1249"/>
		<updated>2018-05-15T11:44:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmh: /* Technical settings */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:UMS School App.png|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
UMS School App is available for iPhone, Android and Windows Phone. It will be designed with the school’s own logo, color and style. The app gives the basic functionality to see:&lt;br /&gt;
*News&lt;br /&gt;
*Timetable&lt;br /&gt;
*Homework&lt;br /&gt;
*Grades&lt;br /&gt;
*User information&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additional licenses gives the ability to create, edit and see more information from various modules. For an overview of module requirement see &amp;quot;[http://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=App&amp;amp;section=6&amp;amp;wteswitched=1#Additional_functionality Additional functionality&amp;quot;]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support ==&lt;br /&gt;
We provide regular support for the following and newer versions:&lt;br /&gt;
* Android version 5.1. We support the same versions as Google provide security updates for. Find an overview [[wikipedia:Android_version_history|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* iOS version 10 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Windows 10 Mobile (version 10)&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that it is possible to run older versions. If support for older versions is needed, we offer support at our hourly rate. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Prerequisites ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Supported administrative systems ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Userinfo: Easy-A, SIS and Lectio (Only mobile number).&lt;br /&gt;
*Grades: Easy-A, Lectio and SIS&lt;br /&gt;
*Homework: Easy-A and SIS.&lt;br /&gt;
*Timetable: Easy-A and SIS&lt;br /&gt;
*Attendance registration: Timetable data is retrieved from Easy-A, SIS, LUDUS, Tabulex and Lectio. Howerver, absence is only registered to Easy-A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Module requirements ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*UMS Web (contains and run all the webservice that is required for the app to receive information and communicate with the server)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Additional functionality ===&lt;br /&gt;
You get more functionality in the app by having the following modules, these are all optional:&lt;br /&gt;
*Attendance Registration: Gives “Your attendance”, which shows student statistics, the student are able to add absence reason and see their absence status in the timetable&lt;br /&gt;
*Attendance Registration for UMS School App: gives employee “attendance registration” and student the ability to &amp;quot;report absence&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*Homework: gives the employee the ability to create homework&lt;br /&gt;
*Link Collection: gives links/bookmarks the school can setup&lt;br /&gt;
*User info: gives “Your information” the ability to edit the information. This also adds the functionality for the user to upload a new profile image (a selfie) to be used in the student id card&lt;br /&gt;
*Student &amp;amp; Employee Id: Gives the students a “student id card” and the employees an “employee id card”. To update their student id card profile image you’ll need the “User info” module&lt;br /&gt;
*Parking: Parkzone &amp;amp; APCOA Integration. Gives the option to create and edit parking permits from Parkzone and APCOA&lt;br /&gt;
*User information (add/edit)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: All Attendance functionality requires Attendance Registration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Testing after setup ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The app will be tested internally at inLogic before release. The test requires access to a user with relevant data. You can either create a fictional student who is associated to a real course, or alternatively use a real student&#039;s account, if the person agrees that the account is being used for a system test of the school&#039;s APP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== What to have ready ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Important&#039;&#039;&#039;: The UMS site needs to use HTTPS and be public available. It needs a valid SSL certificate.&lt;br /&gt;
*Materials that can be used for designing the app. For example: Logo, brochure, design guide line, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Optional: It is possible for the school to have its own account where the app is located. An account in the App Store cost $99 per year, while an account for Google Play costs a onetime fee of $25. The school self-manage these accounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Physical hardware requirements ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Having a smartphone is a necessity, either an Android, iOS or a Windows 10 Mobile.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Should third party be contacted ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the school is using a dedicated hosting service, they have to be informed on how you wish the news feed should be setup.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Styling ==&lt;br /&gt;
To style the app we need the following:&lt;br /&gt;
* Primary color&lt;br /&gt;
* Secondary color&lt;br /&gt;
* Logo (vector file: .psd, .ai etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
* Icon (vector file: .psd, .ai etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The primary color will mostly be used for all static view. Secondary color will be used when something is active or being activated like a button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Optional:&lt;br /&gt;
* Background image for login (size 1080x1920)&lt;br /&gt;
* Background image for top bar of menu (size 1080x480)&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App loginwithbaggrund.png|thumb|none|393x393px|Background image for login]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App menuwithbaggrund.png|none|thumb|394x394px|Background image for top bar of menu]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Installation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
inLogic will publish the app either through inLogics account or your schools own account if you have acquired one. If you have your own account inLogic needs to be informed as well. To publish the app, inLogic needs the following information&lt;br /&gt;
* [[UMS Web]] url path - (If you are running any kind of gateway (TMG, UAG etc.) you will need to create rules for the services on UMS Web, contact us for more information)&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;https://*****.dk/&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* The schools logo - (Max. 1024x576)&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Logo.png|none|thumb|Example of the inLogic logo used in the Demo app]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Primary and secondary colors&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App - Timetable view.png|none|thumb|Example of primary and secondary colors used in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
The primary color is used in the Header navigation bar, and the secondary color as border on the selected Calendar date&lt;br /&gt;
]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Optional resources ===&lt;br /&gt;
* App logo - (1024x1024)&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Simulator Screen Shot - iPhone SE - 2018-05-15 at 12.57.23.png|none|thumb|Example of app logo in use]]&lt;br /&gt;
If not supplied, inLogic will generate an App logo based on the schools logo&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Login background image - (1080x1920)&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App - Login screen.png|none|thumb|Example of a background image used on the Demo app login screen.&lt;br /&gt;
The school logo will be displayed on top of the background image, as seen here&lt;br /&gt;
]]&lt;br /&gt;
If not supplied, a white background will be shown&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Menu top bar image - (1080x480)&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App - Sidebar menu.png|none|thumb|Example of an image used on the Demo app menu view]]&lt;br /&gt;
If not supplied, a white background will be shown&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Technical settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following sections show how to configurate the app. The information only applies to services that is directly connected to the app, i.e. how to set up schedule tasks in the app. The only exception is &#039;UMS RSS Feeds&#039;, which is a specific service for app. If a fully detailed setup guide is needed, please go to that specific module. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some of the configurations are not set up specifically for app, i.e. ParkZone. If you cannot find the setup guide you are looking for, you can find it by searching or on the front page. Please note that some changes made in the configurator not only will affect the app but also UMS Web.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important&#039;&#039;&#039; As many settings only loads once the website is initializing, most changes require an IIS reset on the server. The app retrieves settings from UMS once a day, which means that changes will be visible the next time you log in or the next day.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Menu Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You are able to set the order and which menu buttons should be shown per template for the users&lt;br /&gt;
#Open UMS Configurator&lt;br /&gt;
#Templates -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; select a template -&amp;gt; App&lt;br /&gt;
#Under Menu order select Manage -&amp;gt; Add&lt;br /&gt;
#Write a Description&lt;br /&gt;
#Drap and drop the menu you want&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MeunOrderSettings.png|none|thumb|491x491px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Here three menubuttons will be visible to the users on that specific template.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== News ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This describes how to setup news for the app.&lt;br /&gt;
* App News created from UMS Web&lt;br /&gt;
* Add a RSS feed&lt;br /&gt;
* Add Facebook feed&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to use all three setups together. Combine as you like and set difference feed for difference templates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Setup for App News from UMS Web ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to create or use an existing AD group. This group will have access to create and modify news in&lt;br /&gt;
App News on UMS Web.&lt;br /&gt;
#Open UMS Configurator&lt;br /&gt;
#Menu -&amp;gt; Web Setup -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; App&lt;br /&gt;
#Add the AD group for News Access group&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App newsaccessgroup.png|none|thumb|488x488px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Setup for RSS feed ====&lt;br /&gt;
Add server name for the service for RSS feed in Menu -&amp;gt; Modules -&amp;gt; Settings -&amp;gt; RSS Feeds&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App rssfeedservice.png|thumb|none|496x496px]]&lt;br /&gt;
To setup Rss feed you will need the url for the rss. (E.g. http://inlogic.dk/feed)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Menu -&amp;gt; Templates -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; select template -&amp;gt; Rss Feeds&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Manage -&amp;gt; Add… -&amp;gt; Fill in description, feed url and access token&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App rssfeedurl.png|none|thumb|503x503px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; You only need an access token if the feed is from Facebook&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The RSS feed runs as a service called “UMS RSS Feeds”. Default running every 5 min.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App services.png|none|thumb|510x510px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Restart the service to test it and check the output in /UserManagement/RSSFeeds.Log&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App rssfeedlog.png|none|thumb|511x511px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Setup for Facebook news ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to use a Facebook page news feed, you need two things:&lt;br /&gt;
*Facebook Page Url Feed&lt;br /&gt;
*Access Token&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Facebook Page Url Feed =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create the feed url&lt;br /&gt;
#Get your facebook page url&lt;br /&gt;
#*E.g. https://www.facebook.com/inlogic.dk&lt;br /&gt;
#Copy the name. E.g. “inlogic.dk”&lt;br /&gt;
#*Note: this can also be a number “142642699097242”&lt;br /&gt;
#Replace “inlogic.dk” with your name in this url&lt;br /&gt;
#*https://graph.facebook.com/v2.8/inlogic.dk/&lt;br /&gt;
Your facebook page url feed should look something like this:&lt;br /&gt;
*https://graph.facebook.com/v2.8/schoolname/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is your feed URL. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Create a facebook access token =====&lt;br /&gt;
The personal Facebook account that you use to register as a developer does not need to be associated in any way with the page or group whose posts you want to display. You cannot log in to the Developer site using a Facebook Page or Business account. You must use the username and password from your personal Facebook profile. Facebook doesn’t allow businesses to register as developers, only individuals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please follow [https://developers.facebook.com/docs/apps/register Facebook guide] to enable yourself as developer on facebook.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you have a facebook developer account and created an app go to [https://developers.facebook.com/tools/explorer Facebook Graph Explorer]&lt;br /&gt;
#Select application&lt;br /&gt;
#Select “Get Token” and “Get App Token”&lt;br /&gt;
#Copy the Access Token&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App facebookgettoken.png|none|thumb|532x532px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Now you have the access token you need to paste into the configurator.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App rssfeedurl.png|none|thumb|604x604px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Reload the service UMS Rss Feed in Services and look in the RSS Feed log to validate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Grades ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can set the default view for grades, that filters the grades accordingly. The options are Course, Day and period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Configurator -&amp;gt; Web Setup -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; App -&amp;gt; Default grade view&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App gradesview.png|none|thumb|476x476px]]&lt;br /&gt;
To specific the period you can set how your terms are set with start and end day for each period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Configurator -&amp;gt; Modules -&amp;gt; Grades -&amp;gt; Select the Datasource -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; Terms&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App gradesterms.png|none|thumb|481x481px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on which administration system you’re exporting grades from the columns can vary. You can set which grades column should be used and in which order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Configurator -&amp;gt; Web Setup -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; App -&amp;gt; Select grade columns&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App gradescolumns.png|none|thumb|482x482px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Grades in the app&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The grades view in the App will change accordingly to which columns chosen, a max of 4 columns will be shown in the App. The columns will be shown for each grade in order from 1 to 4.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Your information ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can select which fields in user information that should be editable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Configurator -&amp;gt; Web Setup -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; Userinfo&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App userinfo.png|none|thumb|496x496px]]&lt;br /&gt;
You need to set permission before the users are able to upload their own student photo (a selfie).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Configurator -&amp;gt; Web Setup -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; UMS Photo -&amp;gt; Enable Selfie in App&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App userinfoselfie.png|none|thumb|503x503px]]&lt;br /&gt;
This will enable selfie function.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Student ID And Employee ID ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Student ID uses user information and UMS Photo and has no configuration specific for the app.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make sure Anonymous Authentication is enabled for the folder ‘Webservices’ in Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager for the Default Web Site&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To let the users change their student ID card profile image go to the chapter for [[My Information]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Student ID Barcode ====&lt;br /&gt;
Only students imported from Lectio will have a Card ID set by default. Note that not all card IDs can be displayed in all formats. You can set a default bar code format which the students Card ID will be shown as.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Web tasks -&amp;gt; Web setup -&amp;gt; General settings (scroll to bottom)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the barcode format that your scanners support.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Available barcode formats.png|thumb|318x318px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== My Absence ===&lt;br /&gt;
----The students are able to write an absence reason on an already registered subject. This can be enabled in the template editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the template -&amp;gt; Absence -&amp;gt; Manage -&amp;gt; Create a new settings or select an existing one -&amp;gt; Add/Edit&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Check &amp;quot;Allow students to register absence reason&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Absence settings.png|none|thumb|435x435px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Allow students to register absence reason&#039;&#039;&#039; will allow the students to set an absence reason when a teacher has set the student as absent. The student can set an absence reason in &amp;quot;My absence&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Days back&#039;&#039;&#039; is the number of days back the students are allowed to set an absence reason.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Show Course&#039;&#039;&#039; will show the course view (this will effect both web and app).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Show Activity&#039;&#039;&#039; will show the activity view (this will effect both web and app).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Push Notification ===&lt;br /&gt;
----UMS can send push notifications when there are news, grades, or changes in your timetable. It is possible to receive a daily notification with your timetable for the day.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition the app can receive [[SMS Alert]] messages. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To set up push notifications go to Web Setup -&amp;gt; App -&amp;gt; Manage -&amp;gt; Add&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AppPushNotificationSettings.png|none|thumb|383x383px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set the description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
FCM Server Api Key:&lt;br /&gt;
# Receive the key string from inLogic and paste it&lt;br /&gt;
Windows Phone:&lt;br /&gt;
# Receive the Package SID and Client secret from inLogic and paste the strings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== School account ====&lt;br /&gt;
In case the school has it&#039;s own account do the following to retrieve the information&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
FCM Server Api Key:&lt;br /&gt;
# Open https://play.google.com/apps/publish&lt;br /&gt;
# Google Play Console -&amp;gt; Settings -&amp;gt; API Access -&amp;gt; Create linked project and open it -&amp;gt; Credentials&lt;br /&gt;
# Create API Key&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the API Key and make key restriction for Android&lt;br /&gt;
# Type in your package name and SHA-1 certificate fingerprint&lt;br /&gt;
# Copy the API key and paste it inside FCM Server API Key&lt;br /&gt;
Windows Phone:&lt;br /&gt;
# Open https://developer.microsoft.com/en-us/dashboard/apps/overview&lt;br /&gt;
# Select your app&lt;br /&gt;
# Services -&amp;gt; Push notification -&amp;gt; WNS/MPNS&lt;br /&gt;
# Select &amp;quot;Live Services site&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Copy and paste the Package SID into the configurator&lt;br /&gt;
# Generate an Application Secret if none exist&lt;br /&gt;
# Copy and paste the Application Secret into the configurator (This is the Client Secret)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Links ===&lt;br /&gt;
----[[UMS Links]] can be used by both UMS Web and UMS App. Check the [[UMS Links|guide]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Homework ===&lt;br /&gt;
----See [[UMS Homework]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Parking ===&lt;br /&gt;
----See [[Parking]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Notify absence ===&lt;br /&gt;
----See [[Attendance Registration#SMS and App settings for notify absence|App settings for notify absence in attendance registration]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sms Alert ===&lt;br /&gt;
----See [[SMS Alert]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== FAQ ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Untrusted Certificate Error on Android ===&lt;br /&gt;
Can&#039;t login on older Android mobile running a version between 4.1 and 5.1? This could be due to an untrusted Comodo SSL Certificate. We were able to reproduced it on Android version 4.1, 4.4.2 and 5.0.1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can test your SSL certificate on https://sslanalyzer.comodoca.com/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do the following on the server&lt;br /&gt;
# Delete the Comodo RSA Certification Authority issued by Comodo RSA Certification Authority with an expiration date of January 18, 2038.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enable automatic root certificate updates on the server&lt;br /&gt;
Please checkout the Comodo support site: https://support.comodo.com/index.php?/Knowledgebase/Article/View/1019/38/untrusted-certificate-error-on-android&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For future conservation:&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;Certificate is not installed correctly; the certificate needs to be chained back to the Addtrust root certificate in order to be trusted on the Android.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;The issue is that the Windows server is not presenting the complete certificate chain; clients which do not have the complete certificate chain will result in this error as encountered on the Android phone. In order to resolve this, on the server which this certificate is installed on, please open the MMC (Microsoft Management Console), and add the certificate snap-in for the computer account on the local computer.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;In the Intermediate Certification Authorities folder, verify if the Comodo RSA Domain Validation Secure Server CA and Comodo RSA Certification Authority(issued to Comodo RSA Certification Authority, issued by AddTrustExternal CA Root) are installed in this certificate store.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;In the Trusted Root Certification Authorities folder verify if the AddTrustExternal CA Root is installed.  Also, if you see the Comodo RSA Certification Authority (issued to and issued by Comodo RSA Certification Authority with an expiration date of January 18, 2038) is present, if it is please delete this certificate.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;If any of these certificates are missing  the intermediate and root certificates were provided to you in the .zip file when the certificate was issued, or are available via this support article - &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;https://support.comodo.com/index.php?/Default/Knowledgebase/Article/View/979/108/domain-validation-sha-2&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; .&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;If you had to delete the Comodo RSA Certification Authority from the Trusted Root Authorities folder, you will also need to disable automatic root certificate updates on the server - https://support.comodo.com/index.php?/Default/Knowledgebase/Article/View/769/17/turn-off-automatic-root-certificates-updates-server-2008&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;If you have performed these steps and the certificate chain has not updated on the server, to force IIS to update the certificate chain you will need to either change the certificate binding in IIS to another certificate, and then switch the certificate bindings to the correct certificate. Alternately, you will need to restart the server.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;Conservation for https://support.comodo.com/index.php?/Default/Knowledgebase/Article/View/769/17/turn-off-automatic-root-certificates-updates-server-2008&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;To perform this procedure, you must be a member of the local Administrators group, or you must have been delegated the appropriate authority.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;To turn off Automatic Root Certificates Update:&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;1. Click Start, and then click Run.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;2. Type gpedit.msc, and then click OK.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;3. If the User Account Control dialog box appears, confirm that the action it displays is what you want, and then click Continue.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;4. Double-click Administrative Templates, double-click System, double-click Internet Communication Management, and then click Internet Communication settings.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;5. Double-click Turn off Automatic Root Certificates Update, click Enabled, and then click OK.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;6. Close the Local Group Policy Editor.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;Note: You can use Group Policy to set policy settings that apply across a given site, domain, or organizational unit in Active Directory Domain Services.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmh</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=App&amp;diff=1239</id>
		<title>App</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=App&amp;diff=1239"/>
		<updated>2018-04-24T09:06:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmh: /* Push Notification */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:UMS School App.png|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
UMS School App is available for iPhone, Android and Windows Phone. It will be designed with the school’s own logo, color and style. The app gives the basic functionality to see:&lt;br /&gt;
*News&lt;br /&gt;
*Timetable&lt;br /&gt;
*Homework&lt;br /&gt;
*Grades&lt;br /&gt;
*User information&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additional licenses gives the ability to create, edit and see more information from various modules. For an overview of module requirement see &amp;quot;[http://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=App&amp;amp;section=6&amp;amp;wteswitched=1#Additional_functionality Additional functionality&amp;quot;]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support ==&lt;br /&gt;
We provide regular support for the following and newer versions:&lt;br /&gt;
* Android version 5.1. We support the same versions as Google provide security updates for. Find an overview [[wikipedia:Android_version_history|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* iOS version 10 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Windows 10 Mobile (version 10)&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that it is possible to run older versions. If support for older versions is needed, we offer support at our hourly rate. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Prerequisites ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Supported administrative systems ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Userinfo: Easy-A, SIS and Lectio (Only mobile number).&lt;br /&gt;
*Grades: Easy-A, Lectio and SIS&lt;br /&gt;
*Homework: Easy-A and SIS.&lt;br /&gt;
*Timetable: Easy-A and SIS&lt;br /&gt;
*Attendance registration: Timetable data is retrieved from Easy-A, SIS, LUDUS, Tabulex and Lectio. Howerver, absence is only registered to Easy-A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Module requirements ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*UMS Web (contains and run all the webservice that is required for the app to receive information and communicate with the server)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Additional functionality ===&lt;br /&gt;
You get more functionality in the app by having the following modules, these are all optional:&lt;br /&gt;
*Attendance Registration: Gives “Your attendance”, which shows student statistics, the student are able to add absence reason and see their absence status in the timetable&lt;br /&gt;
*Attendance Registration for UMS School App: gives employee “attendance registration” and student the ability to &amp;quot;report absence&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*Homework: gives the employee the ability to create homework&lt;br /&gt;
*Link Collection: gives links/bookmarks the school can setup&lt;br /&gt;
*User info: gives “Your information” the ability to edit the information. This also adds the functionality for the user to upload a new profile image (a selfie) to be used in the student id card&lt;br /&gt;
*Student &amp;amp; Employee Id: Gives the students a “student id card” and the employees an “employee id card”. To update their student id card profile image you’ll need the “User info” module&lt;br /&gt;
*Parking: Parkzone &amp;amp; APCOA Integration. Gives the option to create and edit parking permits from Parkzone and APCOA&lt;br /&gt;
*User information (add/edit)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: All Attendance functionality requires Attendance Registration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Testing after setup ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The app will be tested internally at inLogic before release. The test requires access to a user with relevant data. You can either create a fictional student who is associated to a real course, or alternatively use a real student&#039;s account, if the person agrees that the account is being used for a system test of the school&#039;s APP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== What to have ready ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Important&#039;&#039;&#039;: The UMS site needs to use HTTPS and be public available. It needs a valid SSL certificate.&lt;br /&gt;
*Materials that can be used for designing the app. For example: Logo, brochure, design guide line, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Optional: It is possible for the school to have its own account where the app is located. An account in the App Store cost $99 per year, while an account for Google Play costs a onetime fee of $25. The school self-manage these accounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Physical hardware requirements ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Having a smartphone is a necessity, either an Android, iOS or a Windows 10 Mobile.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Should third party be contacted ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the school is using a dedicated hosting service, they have to be informed on how you wish the news feed should be setup.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Styling ==&lt;br /&gt;
To style the app we need the following:&lt;br /&gt;
* Primary color&lt;br /&gt;
* Secondary color&lt;br /&gt;
* Logo (vector file: .psd, .ai etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
* Icon (vector file: .psd, .ai etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The primary color will mostly be used for all static view. Secondary color will be used when something is active or being activated like a button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Optional:&lt;br /&gt;
* Background image for login (size 1080x1920)&lt;br /&gt;
* Background image for top bar of menu (size 1080x480)&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App loginwithbaggrund.png|thumb|none|393x393px|Background image for login]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App menuwithbaggrund.png|none|thumb|394x394px|Background image for top bar of menu]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Installation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Provide the [[UMS Web]] url path to inLogic (+4542408815). If you are running any kind of gateway (TMG, UAG etc.) you will need to create rules for the services on UMS Web, contact us for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
inLogic will publish the app either through inLogics account or your schools own account if you have acquired one. If you have your own account inLogic needs to be informed as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Technical settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each chapter only covers specific configuration that involves and applies to the app. For a full detail guide for each module open the corresponding manual. This manual also doesn’t include how to setup schedules task and services that isn’t directly affiliated with the app, the only exception is the service “UMS RSS Feeds” that is specific for the app.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you can’t find the module you’re looking for in this guide please search for the page. E.g. ParkZone is not describe in this guide as there is no specific configuration that will affect the app alone. Be aware that some changes in the configurator listed in this guide will not only effect the app but also the UMS Web for that specific module.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important&#039;&#039;&#039; Most changes will require an IIS reset on the server before it will take effect due to many settings is only loaded once when the website is initializing. The app retrieves settings from UMS once a day, so when you make a change it will take effect in the app the next day or when you log in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Menu Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You are able to set the order and which menu buttons should be shown per template for the users&lt;br /&gt;
#Open UMS Configurator&lt;br /&gt;
#Templates -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; select a template -&amp;gt; App&lt;br /&gt;
#Under Menu order select Manage -&amp;gt; Add&lt;br /&gt;
#Write a Description&lt;br /&gt;
#Drap and drop the menu you want&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MeunOrderSettings.png|none|thumb|491x491px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Here three menubuttons will be visible to the users on that specific template.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== News ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This describes how to setup news for the app.&lt;br /&gt;
* App News created from UMS Web&lt;br /&gt;
* Add a RSS feed&lt;br /&gt;
* Add Facebook feed&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to use all three setups together. Combine as you like and set difference feed for difference templates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Setup for App News from UMS Web ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to create or use an existing AD group. This group will have access to create and modify news in&lt;br /&gt;
App News on UMS Web.&lt;br /&gt;
#Open UMS Configurator&lt;br /&gt;
#Menu -&amp;gt; Web Setup -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; App&lt;br /&gt;
#Add the AD group for News Access group&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App newsaccessgroup.png|none|thumb|488x488px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Setup for RSS feed ====&lt;br /&gt;
Add server name for the service for RSS feed in Menu -&amp;gt; Modules -&amp;gt; Settings -&amp;gt; RSS Feeds&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App rssfeedservice.png|thumb|none|496x496px]]&lt;br /&gt;
To setup Rss feed you will need the url for the rss. (E.g. http://inlogic.dk/feed)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Menu -&amp;gt; Templates -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; select template -&amp;gt; Rss Feeds&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Manage -&amp;gt; Add… -&amp;gt; Fill in description, feed url and access token&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App rssfeedurl.png|none|thumb|503x503px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; You only need an access token if the feed is from Facebook&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The RSS feed runs as a service called “UMS RSS Feeds”. Default running every 5 min.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App services.png|none|thumb|510x510px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Restart the service to test it and check the output in /UserManagement/RSSFeeds.Log&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App rssfeedlog.png|none|thumb|511x511px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Setup for Facebook news ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to use a Facebook page news feed, you need two things:&lt;br /&gt;
*Facebook Page Url Feed&lt;br /&gt;
*Access Token&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Facebook Page Url Feed =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create the feed url&lt;br /&gt;
#Get your facebook page url&lt;br /&gt;
#*E.g. https://www.facebook.com/inlogic.dk&lt;br /&gt;
#Copy the name. E.g. “inlogic.dk”&lt;br /&gt;
#*Note: this can also be a number “142642699097242”&lt;br /&gt;
#Replace “inlogic.dk” with your name in this url&lt;br /&gt;
#*https://graph.facebook.com/v2.8/inlogic.dk/&lt;br /&gt;
Your facebook page url feed should look something like this:&lt;br /&gt;
*https://graph.facebook.com/v2.8/schoolname/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is your feed URL. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Create a facebook access token =====&lt;br /&gt;
The personal Facebook account that you use to register as a developer does not need to be associated in any way with the page or group whose posts you want to display. You cannot log in to the Developer site using a Facebook Page or Business account. You must use the username and password from your personal Facebook profile. Facebook doesn’t allow businesses to register as developers, only individuals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please follow [https://developers.facebook.com/docs/apps/register Facebook guide] to enable yourself as developer on facebook.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you have a facebook developer account and created an app go to [https://developers.facebook.com/tools/explorer Facebook Graph Explorer]&lt;br /&gt;
#Select application&lt;br /&gt;
#Select “Get Token” and “Get App Token”&lt;br /&gt;
#Copy the Access Token&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App facebookgettoken.png|none|thumb|532x532px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Now you have the access token you need to paste into the configurator.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App rssfeedurl.png|none|thumb|604x604px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Reload the service UMS Rss Feed in Services and look in the RSS Feed log to validate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Grades ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can set the default view for grades, that filters the grades accordingly. The options are Course, Day and period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Configurator -&amp;gt; Web Setup -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; App -&amp;gt; Default grade view&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App gradesview.png|none|thumb|476x476px]]&lt;br /&gt;
To specific the period you can set how your terms are set with start and end day for each period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Configurator -&amp;gt; Modules -&amp;gt; Grades -&amp;gt; Select the Datasource -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; Terms&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App gradesterms.png|none|thumb|481x481px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on which administration system you’re exporting grades from the columns can vary. You can set which grades column should be used and in which order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Configurator -&amp;gt; Web Setup -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; App -&amp;gt; Select grade columns&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App gradescolumns.png|none|thumb|482x482px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Grades in the app&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The grades view in the App will change accordingly to which columns chosen, a max of 4 columns will be shown in the App. The columns will be shown for each grade in order from 1 to 4.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Your information ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can select which fields in user information that should be editable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Configurator -&amp;gt; Web Setup -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; Userinfo&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App userinfo.png|none|thumb|496x496px]]&lt;br /&gt;
You need to set permission before the users are able to upload their own student photo (a selfie).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Configurator -&amp;gt; Web Setup -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; UMS Photo -&amp;gt; Enable Selfie in App&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App userinfoselfie.png|none|thumb|503x503px]]&lt;br /&gt;
This will enable selfie function.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Student ID And Employee ID ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Student ID uses user information and UMS Photo and has no configuration specific for the app.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make sure Anonymous Authentication is enabled for the folder ‘Webservices’ in Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager for the Default Web Site&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To let the users change their student ID card profile image go to the chapter for [[My Information]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Student ID Barcode ====&lt;br /&gt;
Only students imported from Lectio will have a Card ID set by default. Note that not all card IDs can be displayed in all formats. You can set a default bar code format which the students Card ID will be shown as.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Web tasks -&amp;gt; Web setup -&amp;gt; General settings (scroll to bottom)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the barcode format that your scanners support.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Available barcode formats.png|thumb|318x318px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== My Absence ===&lt;br /&gt;
----The students are able to write an absence reason on an already registered subject. This can be enabled in the template editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the template -&amp;gt; Absence -&amp;gt; Manage -&amp;gt; Create a new settings or select an existing one -&amp;gt; Add/Edit&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Check &amp;quot;Allow students to register absence reason&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Absence settings.png|none|thumb|435x435px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Allow students to register absence reason&#039;&#039;&#039; will allow the students to set an absence reason when a teacher has set the student as absent. The student can set an absence reason in &amp;quot;My absence&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Days back&#039;&#039;&#039; is the number of days back the students are allowed to set an absence reason.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Show Course&#039;&#039;&#039; will show the course view (this will effect both web and app).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Show Activity&#039;&#039;&#039; will show the activity view (this will effect both web and app).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Push Notification ===&lt;br /&gt;
----UMS can send push notifications when there are news, grades, or changes in your timetable. It is possible to receive a daily notification with your timetable for the day.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition the app can receive [[SMS Alert]] messages. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To set up push notifications go to Web Setup -&amp;gt; App -&amp;gt; Manage -&amp;gt; Add&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AppPushNotificationSettings.png|none|thumb|383x383px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set the description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
FCM Server Api Key:&lt;br /&gt;
# Receive the key string from inLogic and paste it&lt;br /&gt;
Windows Phone:&lt;br /&gt;
# Receive the Package SID and Client secret from inLogic and paste the strings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== School account ====&lt;br /&gt;
In case the school has it&#039;s own account do the following to retrieve the information&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
FCM Server Api Key:&lt;br /&gt;
# Open https://play.google.com/apps/publish&lt;br /&gt;
# Google Play Console -&amp;gt; Settings -&amp;gt; API Access -&amp;gt; Create linked project and open it -&amp;gt; Credentials&lt;br /&gt;
# Create API Key&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the API Key and make key restriction for Android&lt;br /&gt;
# Type in your package name and SHA-1 certificate fingerprint&lt;br /&gt;
# Copy the API key and paste it inside FCM Server API Key&lt;br /&gt;
Windows Phone:&lt;br /&gt;
# Open https://developer.microsoft.com/en-us/dashboard/apps/overview&lt;br /&gt;
# Select your app&lt;br /&gt;
# Services -&amp;gt; Push notification -&amp;gt; WNS/MPNS&lt;br /&gt;
# Select &amp;quot;Live Services site&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Copy and paste the Package SID into the configurator&lt;br /&gt;
# Generate an Application Secret if none exist&lt;br /&gt;
# Copy and paste the Application Secret into the configurator (This is the Client Secret)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Links ===&lt;br /&gt;
----[[UMS Links]] can be used by both UMS Web and UMS App. Check the [[UMS Links|guide]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Homework ===&lt;br /&gt;
----See [[UMS Homework]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Parking ===&lt;br /&gt;
----See [[Parking]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Notify absence ===&lt;br /&gt;
----See [[Attendance Registration#SMS and App settings for notify absence|App settings for notify absence in attendance registration]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sms Alert ===&lt;br /&gt;
----See [[SMS Alert]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== FAQ ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Untrusted Certificate Error on Android ===&lt;br /&gt;
Can&#039;t login on older Android mobile running a version between 4.1 and 5.1? This could be due to an untrusted Comodo SSL Certificate. We were able to reproduced it on Android version 4.1, 4.4.2 and 5.0.1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can test your SSL certificate on https://sslanalyzer.comodoca.com/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do the following on the server&lt;br /&gt;
# Delete the Comodo RSA Certification Authority issued by Comodo RSA Certification Authority with an expiration date of January 18, 2038.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enable automatic root certificate updates on the server&lt;br /&gt;
Please checkout the Comodo support site: https://support.comodo.com/index.php?/Knowledgebase/Article/View/1019/38/untrusted-certificate-error-on-android&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For future conservation:&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;Certificate is not installed correctly; the certificate needs to be chained back to the Addtrust root certificate in order to be trusted on the Android.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;The issue is that the Windows server is not presenting the complete certificate chain; clients which do not have the complete certificate chain will result in this error as encountered on the Android phone. In order to resolve this, on the server which this certificate is installed on, please open the MMC (Microsoft Management Console), and add the certificate snap-in for the computer account on the local computer.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;In the Intermediate Certification Authorities folder, verify if the Comodo RSA Domain Validation Secure Server CA and Comodo RSA Certification Authority(issued to Comodo RSA Certification Authority, issued by AddTrustExternal CA Root) are installed in this certificate store.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;In the Trusted Root Certification Authorities folder verify if the AddTrustExternal CA Root is installed.  Also, if you see the Comodo RSA Certification Authority (issued to and issued by Comodo RSA Certification Authority with an expiration date of January 18, 2038) is present, if it is please delete this certificate.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;If any of these certificates are missing  the intermediate and root certificates were provided to you in the .zip file when the certificate was issued, or are available via this support article - &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;https://support.comodo.com/index.php?/Default/Knowledgebase/Article/View/979/108/domain-validation-sha-2&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; .&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;If you had to delete the Comodo RSA Certification Authority from the Trusted Root Authorities folder, you will also need to disable automatic root certificate updates on the server - https://support.comodo.com/index.php?/Default/Knowledgebase/Article/View/769/17/turn-off-automatic-root-certificates-updates-server-2008&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;If you have performed these steps and the certificate chain has not updated on the server, to force IIS to update the certificate chain you will need to either change the certificate binding in IIS to another certificate, and then switch the certificate bindings to the correct certificate. Alternately, you will need to restart the server.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;Conservation for https://support.comodo.com/index.php?/Default/Knowledgebase/Article/View/769/17/turn-off-automatic-root-certificates-updates-server-2008&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;To perform this procedure, you must be a member of the local Administrators group, or you must have been delegated the appropriate authority.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;To turn off Automatic Root Certificates Update:&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;1. Click Start, and then click Run.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;2. Type gpedit.msc, and then click OK.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;3. If the User Account Control dialog box appears, confirm that the action it displays is what you want, and then click Continue.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;4. Double-click Administrative Templates, double-click System, double-click Internet Communication Management, and then click Internet Communication settings.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;5. Double-click Turn off Automatic Root Certificates Update, click Enabled, and then click OK.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;6. Close the Local Group Policy Editor.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;Note: You can use Group Policy to set policy settings that apply across a given site, domain, or organizational unit in Active Directory Domain Services.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmh</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=App&amp;diff=1238</id>
		<title>App</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=App&amp;diff=1238"/>
		<updated>2018-04-23T14:55:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmh: /* Styling */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:UMS School App.png|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
UMS School App is available for iPhone, Android and Windows Phone. It will be designed with the school’s own logo, color and style. The app gives the basic functionality to see:&lt;br /&gt;
*News&lt;br /&gt;
*Timetable&lt;br /&gt;
*Homework&lt;br /&gt;
*Grades&lt;br /&gt;
*User information&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additional licenses gives the ability to create, edit and see more information from various modules. For an overview of module requirement see &amp;quot;[http://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=App&amp;amp;section=6&amp;amp;wteswitched=1#Additional_functionality Additional functionality&amp;quot;]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support ==&lt;br /&gt;
We provide regular support for the following and newer versions:&lt;br /&gt;
* Android version 5.1. We support the same versions as Google provide security updates for. Find an overview [[wikipedia:Android_version_history|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* iOS version 10 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Windows 10 Mobile (version 10)&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that it is possible to run older versions. If support for older versions is needed, we offer support at our hourly rate. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Prerequisites ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Supported administrative systems ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Userinfo: Easy-A, SIS and Lectio (Only mobile number).&lt;br /&gt;
*Grades: Easy-A, Lectio and SIS&lt;br /&gt;
*Homework: Easy-A and SIS.&lt;br /&gt;
*Timetable: Easy-A and SIS&lt;br /&gt;
*Attendance registration: Timetable data is retrieved from Easy-A, SIS, LUDUS, Tabulex and Lectio. Howerver, absence is only registered to Easy-A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Module requirements ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*UMS Web (contains and run all the webservice that is required for the app to receive information and communicate with the server)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Additional functionality ===&lt;br /&gt;
You get more functionality in the app by having the following modules, these are all optional:&lt;br /&gt;
*Attendance Registration: Gives “Your attendance”, which shows student statistics, the student are able to add absence reason and see their absence status in the timetable&lt;br /&gt;
*Attendance Registration for UMS School App: gives employee “attendance registration” and student the ability to &amp;quot;report absence&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*Homework: gives the employee the ability to create homework&lt;br /&gt;
*Link Collection: gives links/bookmarks the school can setup&lt;br /&gt;
*User info: gives “Your information” the ability to edit the information. This also adds the functionality for the user to upload a new profile image (a selfie) to be used in the student id card&lt;br /&gt;
*Student &amp;amp; Employee Id: Gives the students a “student id card” and the employees an “employee id card”. To update their student id card profile image you’ll need the “User info” module&lt;br /&gt;
*Parking: Parkzone &amp;amp; APCOA Integration. Gives the option to create and edit parking permits from Parkzone and APCOA&lt;br /&gt;
*User information (add/edit)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: All Attendance functionality requires Attendance Registration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Testing after setup ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The app will be tested internally at inLogic before release. The test requires access to a user with relevant data. You can either create a fictional student who is associated to a real course, or alternatively use a real student&#039;s account, if the person agrees that the account is being used for a system test of the school&#039;s APP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== What to have ready ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Important&#039;&#039;&#039;: The UMS site needs to use HTTPS and be public available. It needs a valid SSL certificate.&lt;br /&gt;
*Materials that can be used for designing the app. For example: Logo, brochure, design guide line, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Optional: It is possible for the school to have its own account where the app is located. An account in the App Store cost $99 per year, while an account for Google Play costs a onetime fee of $25. The school self-manage these accounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Physical hardware requirements ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Having a smartphone is a necessity, either an Android, iOS or a Windows 10 Mobile.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Should third party be contacted ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the school is using a dedicated hosting service, they have to be informed on how you wish the news feed should be setup.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Styling ==&lt;br /&gt;
To style the app we need the following:&lt;br /&gt;
* Primary color&lt;br /&gt;
* Secondary color&lt;br /&gt;
* Logo (vector file: .psd, .ai etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
* Icon (vector file: .psd, .ai etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The primary color will mostly be used for all static view. Secondary color will be used when something is active or being activated like a button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Optional:&lt;br /&gt;
* Background image for login (size 1080x1920)&lt;br /&gt;
* Background image for top bar of menu (size 1080x480)&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App loginwithbaggrund.png|thumb|none|393x393px|Background image for login]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App menuwithbaggrund.png|none|thumb|394x394px|Background image for top bar of menu]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Installation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Provide the [[UMS Web]] url path to inLogic (+4542408815). If you are running any kind of gateway (TMG, UAG etc.) you will need to create rules for the services on UMS Web, contact us for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
inLogic will publish the app either through inLogics account or your schools own account if you have acquired one. If you have your own account inLogic needs to be informed as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Technical settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each chapter only covers specific configuration that involves and applies to the app. For a full detail guide for each module open the corresponding manual. This manual also doesn’t include how to setup schedules task and services that isn’t directly affiliated with the app, the only exception is the service “UMS RSS Feeds” that is specific for the app.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you can’t find the module you’re looking for in this guide please search for the page. E.g. ParkZone is not describe in this guide as there is no specific configuration that will affect the app alone. Be aware that some changes in the configurator listed in this guide will not only effect the app but also the UMS Web for that specific module.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important&#039;&#039;&#039; Most changes will require an IIS reset on the server before it will take effect due to many settings is only loaded once when the website is initializing. The app retrieves settings from UMS once a day, so when you make a change it will take effect in the app the next day or when you log in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Menu Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You are able to set the order and which menu buttons should be shown per template for the users&lt;br /&gt;
#Open UMS Configurator&lt;br /&gt;
#Templates -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; select a template -&amp;gt; App&lt;br /&gt;
#Under Menu order select Manage -&amp;gt; Add&lt;br /&gt;
#Write a Description&lt;br /&gt;
#Drap and drop the menu you want&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MeunOrderSettings.png|none|thumb|491x491px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Here three menubuttons will be visible to the users on that specific template.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== News ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This describes how to setup news for the app.&lt;br /&gt;
* App News created from UMS Web&lt;br /&gt;
* Add a RSS feed&lt;br /&gt;
* Add Facebook feed&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to use all three setups together. Combine as you like and set difference feed for difference templates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Setup for App News from UMS Web ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to create or use an existing AD group. This group will have access to create and modify news in&lt;br /&gt;
App News on UMS Web.&lt;br /&gt;
#Open UMS Configurator&lt;br /&gt;
#Menu -&amp;gt; Web Setup -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; App&lt;br /&gt;
#Add the AD group for News Access group&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App newsaccessgroup.png|none|thumb|488x488px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Setup for RSS feed ====&lt;br /&gt;
Add server name for the service for RSS feed in Menu -&amp;gt; Modules -&amp;gt; Settings -&amp;gt; RSS Feeds&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App rssfeedservice.png|thumb|none|496x496px]]&lt;br /&gt;
To setup Rss feed you will need the url for the rss. (E.g. http://inlogic.dk/feed)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Menu -&amp;gt; Templates -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; select template -&amp;gt; Rss Feeds&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Manage -&amp;gt; Add… -&amp;gt; Fill in description, feed url and access token&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App rssfeedurl.png|none|thumb|503x503px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; You only need an access token if the feed is from Facebook&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The RSS feed runs as a service called “UMS RSS Feeds”. Default running every 5 min.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App services.png|none|thumb|510x510px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Restart the service to test it and check the output in /UserManagement/RSSFeeds.Log&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App rssfeedlog.png|none|thumb|511x511px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Setup for Facebook news ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to use a Facebook page news feed, you need two things:&lt;br /&gt;
*Facebook Page Url Feed&lt;br /&gt;
*Access Token&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Facebook Page Url Feed =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create the feed url&lt;br /&gt;
#Get your facebook page url&lt;br /&gt;
#*E.g. https://www.facebook.com/inlogic.dk&lt;br /&gt;
#Copy the name. E.g. “inlogic.dk”&lt;br /&gt;
#*Note: this can also be a number “142642699097242”&lt;br /&gt;
#Replace “inlogic.dk” with your name in this url&lt;br /&gt;
#*https://graph.facebook.com/v2.8/inlogic.dk/&lt;br /&gt;
Your facebook page url feed should look something like this:&lt;br /&gt;
*https://graph.facebook.com/v2.8/schoolname/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is your feed URL. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Create a facebook access token =====&lt;br /&gt;
The personal Facebook account that you use to register as a developer does not need to be associated in any way with the page or group whose posts you want to display. You cannot log in to the Developer site using a Facebook Page or Business account. You must use the username and password from your personal Facebook profile. Facebook doesn’t allow businesses to register as developers, only individuals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please follow [https://developers.facebook.com/docs/apps/register Facebook guide] to enable yourself as developer on facebook.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you have a facebook developer account and created an app go to [https://developers.facebook.com/tools/explorer Facebook Graph Explorer]&lt;br /&gt;
#Select application&lt;br /&gt;
#Select “Get Token” and “Get App Token”&lt;br /&gt;
#Copy the Access Token&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App facebookgettoken.png|none|thumb|532x532px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Now you have the access token you need to paste into the configurator.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App rssfeedurl.png|none|thumb|604x604px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Reload the service UMS Rss Feed in Services and look in the RSS Feed log to validate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Grades ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can set the default view for grades, that filters the grades accordingly. The options are Course, Day and period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Configurator -&amp;gt; Web Setup -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; App -&amp;gt; Default grade view&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App gradesview.png|none|thumb|476x476px]]&lt;br /&gt;
To specific the period you can set how your terms are set with start and end day for each period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Configurator -&amp;gt; Modules -&amp;gt; Grades -&amp;gt; Select the Datasource -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; Terms&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App gradesterms.png|none|thumb|481x481px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on which administration system you’re exporting grades from the columns can vary. You can set which grades column should be used and in which order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Configurator -&amp;gt; Web Setup -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; App -&amp;gt; Select grade columns&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App gradescolumns.png|none|thumb|482x482px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Grades in the app&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The grades view in the App will change accordingly to which columns chosen, a max of 4 columns will be shown in the App. The columns will be shown for each grade in order from 1 to 4.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Your information ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can select which fields in user information that should be editable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Configurator -&amp;gt; Web Setup -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; Userinfo&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App userinfo.png|none|thumb|496x496px]]&lt;br /&gt;
You need to set permission before the users are able to upload their own student photo (a selfie).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Configurator -&amp;gt; Web Setup -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; UMS Photo -&amp;gt; Enable Selfie in App&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App userinfoselfie.png|none|thumb|503x503px]]&lt;br /&gt;
This will enable selfie function.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Student ID And Employee ID ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Student ID uses user information and UMS Photo and has no configuration specific for the app.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make sure Anonymous Authentication is enabled for the folder ‘Webservices’ in Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager for the Default Web Site&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To let the users change their student ID card profile image go to the chapter for [[My Information]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Student ID Barcode ====&lt;br /&gt;
Only students imported from Lectio will have a Card ID set by default. Note that not all card IDs can be displayed in all formats. You can set a default bar code format which the students Card ID will be shown as.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Web tasks -&amp;gt; Web setup -&amp;gt; General settings (scroll to bottom)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the barcode format that your scanners support.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Available barcode formats.png|thumb|318x318px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== My Absence ===&lt;br /&gt;
----The students are able to write an absence reason on an already registered subject. This can be enabled in the template editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the template -&amp;gt; Absence -&amp;gt; Manage -&amp;gt; Create a new settings or select an existing one -&amp;gt; Add/Edit&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Check &amp;quot;Allow students to register absence reason&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Absence settings.png|none|thumb|435x435px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Allow students to register absence reason&#039;&#039;&#039; will allow the students to set an absence reason when a teacher has set the student as absent. The student can set an absence reason in &amp;quot;My absence&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Days back&#039;&#039;&#039; is the number of days back the students are allowed to set an absence reason.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Show Course&#039;&#039;&#039; will show the course view (this will effect both web and app).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Show Activity&#039;&#039;&#039; will show the activity view (this will effect both web and app).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Push Notification ===&lt;br /&gt;
----UMS can send push notifications when there are news, grades, or changes in your timetable. It is possible to receive a daily notification with your timetable for the day.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition the app can receive [[SMS Alert]] messages. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Web Setup -&amp;gt; App -&amp;gt; Manage -&amp;gt; Add&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AppPushNotificationSettings.png|none|thumb|383x383px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set the description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
FCM Server Api Key:&lt;br /&gt;
# Receive the key string from inLogic and paste it&lt;br /&gt;
Windows Phone:&lt;br /&gt;
# Receive the Package SID and Client secret from inLogic and paste the strings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== School account ====&lt;br /&gt;
In case the school has it&#039;s own account do the following to retrieve the information&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
FCM Server Api Key:&lt;br /&gt;
# Open https://play.google.com/apps/publish&lt;br /&gt;
# Google Play Console -&amp;gt; Settings -&amp;gt; API Access -&amp;gt; Create linked project and open it -&amp;gt; Credentials&lt;br /&gt;
# Create API Key&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the API Key and make key restriction for Android&lt;br /&gt;
# Type in your package name and SHA-1 certificate fingerprint&lt;br /&gt;
# Copy the API key and paste it inside FCM Server API Key&lt;br /&gt;
Windows Phone:&lt;br /&gt;
# Open https://developer.microsoft.com/en-us/dashboard/apps/overview&lt;br /&gt;
# Select your app&lt;br /&gt;
# Services -&amp;gt; Push notification -&amp;gt; WNS/MPNS&lt;br /&gt;
# Select &amp;quot;Live Services site&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Copy and paste the Package SID into the configurator&lt;br /&gt;
# Generate an Application Secret if none exist&lt;br /&gt;
# Copy and paste the Application Secret into the configurator (This is the Client Secret)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Links ===&lt;br /&gt;
----[[UMS Links]] can be used by both UMS Web and UMS App. Check the [[UMS Links|guide]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Homework ===&lt;br /&gt;
----See [[UMS Homework]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Parking ===&lt;br /&gt;
----See [[Parking]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Notify absence ===&lt;br /&gt;
----See [[Attendance Registration#SMS and App settings for notify absence|App settings for notify absence in attendance registration]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sms Alert ===&lt;br /&gt;
----See [[SMS Alert]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== FAQ ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Untrusted Certificate Error on Android ===&lt;br /&gt;
Can&#039;t login on older Android mobile running a version between 4.1 and 5.1? This could be due to an untrusted Comodo SSL Certificate. We were able to reproduced it on Android version 4.1, 4.4.2 and 5.0.1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can test your SSL certificate on https://sslanalyzer.comodoca.com/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do the following on the server&lt;br /&gt;
# Delete the Comodo RSA Certification Authority issued by Comodo RSA Certification Authority with an expiration date of January 18, 2038.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enable automatic root certificate updates on the server&lt;br /&gt;
Please checkout the Comodo support site: https://support.comodo.com/index.php?/Knowledgebase/Article/View/1019/38/untrusted-certificate-error-on-android&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For future conservation:&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;Certificate is not installed correctly; the certificate needs to be chained back to the Addtrust root certificate in order to be trusted on the Android.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;The issue is that the Windows server is not presenting the complete certificate chain; clients which do not have the complete certificate chain will result in this error as encountered on the Android phone. In order to resolve this, on the server which this certificate is installed on, please open the MMC (Microsoft Management Console), and add the certificate snap-in for the computer account on the local computer.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;In the Intermediate Certification Authorities folder, verify if the Comodo RSA Domain Validation Secure Server CA and Comodo RSA Certification Authority(issued to Comodo RSA Certification Authority, issued by AddTrustExternal CA Root) are installed in this certificate store.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;In the Trusted Root Certification Authorities folder verify if the AddTrustExternal CA Root is installed.  Also, if you see the Comodo RSA Certification Authority (issued to and issued by Comodo RSA Certification Authority with an expiration date of January 18, 2038) is present, if it is please delete this certificate.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;If any of these certificates are missing  the intermediate and root certificates were provided to you in the .zip file when the certificate was issued, or are available via this support article - &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;https://support.comodo.com/index.php?/Default/Knowledgebase/Article/View/979/108/domain-validation-sha-2&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; .&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;If you had to delete the Comodo RSA Certification Authority from the Trusted Root Authorities folder, you will also need to disable automatic root certificate updates on the server - https://support.comodo.com/index.php?/Default/Knowledgebase/Article/View/769/17/turn-off-automatic-root-certificates-updates-server-2008&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;If you have performed these steps and the certificate chain has not updated on the server, to force IIS to update the certificate chain you will need to either change the certificate binding in IIS to another certificate, and then switch the certificate bindings to the correct certificate. Alternately, you will need to restart the server.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;Conservation for https://support.comodo.com/index.php?/Default/Knowledgebase/Article/View/769/17/turn-off-automatic-root-certificates-updates-server-2008&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;To perform this procedure, you must be a member of the local Administrators group, or you must have been delegated the appropriate authority.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;To turn off Automatic Root Certificates Update:&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;1. Click Start, and then click Run.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;2. Type gpedit.msc, and then click OK.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;3. If the User Account Control dialog box appears, confirm that the action it displays is what you want, and then click Continue.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;4. Double-click Administrative Templates, double-click System, double-click Internet Communication Management, and then click Internet Communication settings.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;5. Double-click Turn off Automatic Root Certificates Update, click Enabled, and then click OK.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;6. Close the Local Group Policy Editor.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;Note: You can use Group Policy to set policy settings that apply across a given site, domain, or organizational unit in Active Directory Domain Services.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmh</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=App&amp;diff=1237</id>
		<title>App</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=App&amp;diff=1237"/>
		<updated>2018-04-23T14:54:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmh: /* Installation */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:UMS School App.png|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
UMS School App is available for iPhone, Android and Windows Phone. It will be designed with the school’s own logo, color and style. The app gives the basic functionality to see:&lt;br /&gt;
*News&lt;br /&gt;
*Timetable&lt;br /&gt;
*Homework&lt;br /&gt;
*Grades&lt;br /&gt;
*User information&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additional licenses gives the ability to create, edit and see more information from various modules. For an overview of module requirement see &amp;quot;[http://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=App&amp;amp;section=6&amp;amp;wteswitched=1#Additional_functionality Additional functionality&amp;quot;]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support ==&lt;br /&gt;
We provide regular support for the following and newer versions:&lt;br /&gt;
* Android version 5.1. We support the same versions as Google provide security updates for. Find an overview [[wikipedia:Android_version_history|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* iOS version 10 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Windows 10 Mobile (version 10)&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that it is possible to run older versions. If support for older versions is needed, we offer support at our hourly rate. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Prerequisites ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Supported administrative systems ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Userinfo: Easy-A, SIS and Lectio (Only mobile number).&lt;br /&gt;
*Grades: Easy-A, Lectio and SIS&lt;br /&gt;
*Homework: Easy-A and SIS.&lt;br /&gt;
*Timetable: Easy-A and SIS&lt;br /&gt;
*Attendance registration: Timetable data is retrieved from Easy-A, SIS, LUDUS, Tabulex and Lectio. Howerver, absence is only registered to Easy-A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Module requirements ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*UMS Web (contains and run all the webservice that is required for the app to receive information and communicate with the server)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Additional functionality ===&lt;br /&gt;
You get more functionality in the app by having the following modules, these are all optional:&lt;br /&gt;
*Attendance Registration: Gives “Your attendance”, which shows student statistics, the student are able to add absence reason and see their absence status in the timetable&lt;br /&gt;
*Attendance Registration for UMS School App: gives employee “attendance registration” and student the ability to &amp;quot;report absence&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*Homework: gives the employee the ability to create homework&lt;br /&gt;
*Link Collection: gives links/bookmarks the school can setup&lt;br /&gt;
*User info: gives “Your information” the ability to edit the information. This also adds the functionality for the user to upload a new profile image (a selfie) to be used in the student id card&lt;br /&gt;
*Student &amp;amp; Employee Id: Gives the students a “student id card” and the employees an “employee id card”. To update their student id card profile image you’ll need the “User info” module&lt;br /&gt;
*Parking: Parkzone &amp;amp; APCOA Integration. Gives the option to create and edit parking permits from Parkzone and APCOA&lt;br /&gt;
*User information (add/edit)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: All Attendance functionality requires Attendance Registration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Testing after setup ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The app will be tested internally at inLogic before release. The test requires access to a user with relevant data. You can either create a fictional student who is associated to a real course, or alternatively use a real student&#039;s account, if the person agrees that the account is being used for a system test of the school&#039;s APP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== What to have ready ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Important&#039;&#039;&#039;: The UMS site needs to use HTTPS and be public available. It needs a valid SSL certificate.&lt;br /&gt;
*Materials that can be used for designing the app. For example: Logo, brochure, design guide line, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Optional: It is possible for the school to have its own account where the app is located. An account in the App Store cost $99 per year, while an account for Google Play costs a onetime fee of $25. The school self-manage these accounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Physical hardware requirements ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Having a smartphone is a necessity, either an Android, iOS or a Windows 10 Mobile.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Should third party be contacted ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the school is using a dedicated hosting service, they have to be informed on how you wish the news feed should be setup.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Styling ==&lt;br /&gt;
To style the app we need the following:&lt;br /&gt;
* Primary color&lt;br /&gt;
* Secondary color&lt;br /&gt;
* Logo (vector file: .psd, .ai etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
* Icon (vector file: .psd, .ai etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The primary color will mostly be used for all static view. Secondary color will be used when something is active or being activated like a button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Optional:&lt;br /&gt;
* Background image for login view (size 1080x1920)&lt;br /&gt;
* Background image for top bar of menu (size 1080x480)&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App loginwithbaggrund.png|thumb|none|393x393px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App menuwithbaggrund.png|none|thumb|394x394px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Installation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Provide the [[UMS Web]] url path to inLogic (+4542408815). If you are running any kind of gateway (TMG, UAG etc.) you will need to create rules for the services on UMS Web, contact us for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
inLogic will publish the app either through inLogics account or your schools own account if you have acquired one. If you have your own account inLogic needs to be informed as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Technical settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each chapter only covers specific configuration that involves and applies to the app. For a full detail guide for each module open the corresponding manual. This manual also doesn’t include how to setup schedules task and services that isn’t directly affiliated with the app, the only exception is the service “UMS RSS Feeds” that is specific for the app.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you can’t find the module you’re looking for in this guide please search for the page. E.g. ParkZone is not describe in this guide as there is no specific configuration that will affect the app alone. Be aware that some changes in the configurator listed in this guide will not only effect the app but also the UMS Web for that specific module.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important&#039;&#039;&#039; Most changes will require an IIS reset on the server before it will take effect due to many settings is only loaded once when the website is initializing. The app retrieves settings from UMS once a day, so when you make a change it will take effect in the app the next day or when you log in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Menu Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You are able to set the order and which menu buttons should be shown per template for the users&lt;br /&gt;
#Open UMS Configurator&lt;br /&gt;
#Templates -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; select a template -&amp;gt; App&lt;br /&gt;
#Under Menu order select Manage -&amp;gt; Add&lt;br /&gt;
#Write a Description&lt;br /&gt;
#Drap and drop the menu you want&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MeunOrderSettings.png|none|thumb|491x491px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Here three menubuttons will be visible to the users on that specific template.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== News ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This describes how to setup news for the app.&lt;br /&gt;
* App News created from UMS Web&lt;br /&gt;
* Add a RSS feed&lt;br /&gt;
* Add Facebook feed&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to use all three setups together. Combine as you like and set difference feed for difference templates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Setup for App News from UMS Web ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to create or use an existing AD group. This group will have access to create and modify news in&lt;br /&gt;
App News on UMS Web.&lt;br /&gt;
#Open UMS Configurator&lt;br /&gt;
#Menu -&amp;gt; Web Setup -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; App&lt;br /&gt;
#Add the AD group for News Access group&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App newsaccessgroup.png|none|thumb|488x488px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Setup for RSS feed ====&lt;br /&gt;
Add server name for the service for RSS feed in Menu -&amp;gt; Modules -&amp;gt; Settings -&amp;gt; RSS Feeds&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App rssfeedservice.png|thumb|none|496x496px]]&lt;br /&gt;
To setup Rss feed you will need the url for the rss. (E.g. http://inlogic.dk/feed)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Menu -&amp;gt; Templates -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; select template -&amp;gt; Rss Feeds&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Manage -&amp;gt; Add… -&amp;gt; Fill in description, feed url and access token&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App rssfeedurl.png|none|thumb|503x503px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; You only need an access token if the feed is from Facebook&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The RSS feed runs as a service called “UMS RSS Feeds”. Default running every 5 min.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App services.png|none|thumb|510x510px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Restart the service to test it and check the output in /UserManagement/RSSFeeds.Log&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App rssfeedlog.png|none|thumb|511x511px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Setup for Facebook news ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to use a Facebook page news feed, you need two things:&lt;br /&gt;
*Facebook Page Url Feed&lt;br /&gt;
*Access Token&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Facebook Page Url Feed =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create the feed url&lt;br /&gt;
#Get your facebook page url&lt;br /&gt;
#*E.g. https://www.facebook.com/inlogic.dk&lt;br /&gt;
#Copy the name. E.g. “inlogic.dk”&lt;br /&gt;
#*Note: this can also be a number “142642699097242”&lt;br /&gt;
#Replace “inlogic.dk” with your name in this url&lt;br /&gt;
#*https://graph.facebook.com/v2.8/inlogic.dk/&lt;br /&gt;
Your facebook page url feed should look something like this:&lt;br /&gt;
*https://graph.facebook.com/v2.8/schoolname/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is your feed URL. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Create a facebook access token =====&lt;br /&gt;
The personal Facebook account that you use to register as a developer does not need to be associated in any way with the page or group whose posts you want to display. You cannot log in to the Developer site using a Facebook Page or Business account. You must use the username and password from your personal Facebook profile. Facebook doesn’t allow businesses to register as developers, only individuals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please follow [https://developers.facebook.com/docs/apps/register Facebook guide] to enable yourself as developer on facebook.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you have a facebook developer account and created an app go to [https://developers.facebook.com/tools/explorer Facebook Graph Explorer]&lt;br /&gt;
#Select application&lt;br /&gt;
#Select “Get Token” and “Get App Token”&lt;br /&gt;
#Copy the Access Token&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App facebookgettoken.png|none|thumb|532x532px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Now you have the access token you need to paste into the configurator.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App rssfeedurl.png|none|thumb|604x604px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Reload the service UMS Rss Feed in Services and look in the RSS Feed log to validate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Grades ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can set the default view for grades, that filters the grades accordingly. The options are Course, Day and period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Configurator -&amp;gt; Web Setup -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; App -&amp;gt; Default grade view&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App gradesview.png|none|thumb|476x476px]]&lt;br /&gt;
To specific the period you can set how your terms are set with start and end day for each period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Configurator -&amp;gt; Modules -&amp;gt; Grades -&amp;gt; Select the Datasource -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; Terms&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App gradesterms.png|none|thumb|481x481px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on which administration system you’re exporting grades from the columns can vary. You can set which grades column should be used and in which order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Configurator -&amp;gt; Web Setup -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; App -&amp;gt; Select grade columns&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App gradescolumns.png|none|thumb|482x482px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Grades in the app&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The grades view in the App will change accordingly to which columns chosen, a max of 4 columns will be shown in the App. The columns will be shown for each grade in order from 1 to 4.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Your information ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can select which fields in user information that should be editable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Configurator -&amp;gt; Web Setup -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; Userinfo&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App userinfo.png|none|thumb|496x496px]]&lt;br /&gt;
You need to set permission before the users are able to upload their own student photo (a selfie).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Configurator -&amp;gt; Web Setup -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; UMS Photo -&amp;gt; Enable Selfie in App&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App userinfoselfie.png|none|thumb|503x503px]]&lt;br /&gt;
This will enable selfie function.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Student ID And Employee ID ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Student ID uses user information and UMS Photo and has no configuration specific for the app.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make sure Anonymous Authentication is enabled for the folder ‘Webservices’ in Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager for the Default Web Site&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To let the users change their student ID card profile image go to the chapter for [[My Information]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Student ID Barcode ====&lt;br /&gt;
Only students imported from Lectio will have a Card ID set by default. Note that not all card IDs can be displayed in all formats. You can set a default bar code format which the students Card ID will be shown as.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Web tasks -&amp;gt; Web setup -&amp;gt; General settings (scroll to bottom)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the barcode format that your scanners support.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Available barcode formats.png|thumb|318x318px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== My Absence ===&lt;br /&gt;
----The students are able to write an absence reason on an already registered subject. This can be enabled in the template editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the template -&amp;gt; Absence -&amp;gt; Manage -&amp;gt; Create a new settings or select an existing one -&amp;gt; Add/Edit&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Check &amp;quot;Allow students to register absence reason&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Absence settings.png|none|thumb|435x435px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Allow students to register absence reason&#039;&#039;&#039; will allow the students to set an absence reason when a teacher has set the student as absent. The student can set an absence reason in &amp;quot;My absence&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Days back&#039;&#039;&#039; is the number of days back the students are allowed to set an absence reason.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Show Course&#039;&#039;&#039; will show the course view (this will effect both web and app).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Show Activity&#039;&#039;&#039; will show the activity view (this will effect both web and app).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Push Notification ===&lt;br /&gt;
----UMS can send push notifications when there are news, grades, or changes in your timetable. It is possible to receive a daily notification with your timetable for the day.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition the app can receive [[SMS Alert]] messages. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Web Setup -&amp;gt; App -&amp;gt; Manage -&amp;gt; Add&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AppPushNotificationSettings.png|none|thumb|383x383px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set the description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
FCM Server Api Key:&lt;br /&gt;
# Receive the key string from inLogic and paste it&lt;br /&gt;
Windows Phone:&lt;br /&gt;
# Receive the Package SID and Client secret from inLogic and paste the strings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== School account ====&lt;br /&gt;
In case the school has it&#039;s own account do the following to retrieve the information&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
FCM Server Api Key:&lt;br /&gt;
# Open https://play.google.com/apps/publish&lt;br /&gt;
# Google Play Console -&amp;gt; Settings -&amp;gt; API Access -&amp;gt; Create linked project and open it -&amp;gt; Credentials&lt;br /&gt;
# Create API Key&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the API Key and make key restriction for Android&lt;br /&gt;
# Type in your package name and SHA-1 certificate fingerprint&lt;br /&gt;
# Copy the API key and paste it inside FCM Server API Key&lt;br /&gt;
Windows Phone:&lt;br /&gt;
# Open https://developer.microsoft.com/en-us/dashboard/apps/overview&lt;br /&gt;
# Select your app&lt;br /&gt;
# Services -&amp;gt; Push notification -&amp;gt; WNS/MPNS&lt;br /&gt;
# Select &amp;quot;Live Services site&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Copy and paste the Package SID into the configurator&lt;br /&gt;
# Generate an Application Secret if none exist&lt;br /&gt;
# Copy and paste the Application Secret into the configurator (This is the Client Secret)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Links ===&lt;br /&gt;
----[[UMS Links]] can be used by both UMS Web and UMS App. Check the [[UMS Links|guide]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Homework ===&lt;br /&gt;
----See [[UMS Homework]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Parking ===&lt;br /&gt;
----See [[Parking]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Notify absence ===&lt;br /&gt;
----See [[Attendance Registration#SMS and App settings for notify absence|App settings for notify absence in attendance registration]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sms Alert ===&lt;br /&gt;
----See [[SMS Alert]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== FAQ ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Untrusted Certificate Error on Android ===&lt;br /&gt;
Can&#039;t login on older Android mobile running a version between 4.1 and 5.1? This could be due to an untrusted Comodo SSL Certificate. We were able to reproduced it on Android version 4.1, 4.4.2 and 5.0.1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can test your SSL certificate on https://sslanalyzer.comodoca.com/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do the following on the server&lt;br /&gt;
# Delete the Comodo RSA Certification Authority issued by Comodo RSA Certification Authority with an expiration date of January 18, 2038.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enable automatic root certificate updates on the server&lt;br /&gt;
Please checkout the Comodo support site: https://support.comodo.com/index.php?/Knowledgebase/Article/View/1019/38/untrusted-certificate-error-on-android&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For future conservation:&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;Certificate is not installed correctly; the certificate needs to be chained back to the Addtrust root certificate in order to be trusted on the Android.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;The issue is that the Windows server is not presenting the complete certificate chain; clients which do not have the complete certificate chain will result in this error as encountered on the Android phone. In order to resolve this, on the server which this certificate is installed on, please open the MMC (Microsoft Management Console), and add the certificate snap-in for the computer account on the local computer.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;In the Intermediate Certification Authorities folder, verify if the Comodo RSA Domain Validation Secure Server CA and Comodo RSA Certification Authority(issued to Comodo RSA Certification Authority, issued by AddTrustExternal CA Root) are installed in this certificate store.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;In the Trusted Root Certification Authorities folder verify if the AddTrustExternal CA Root is installed.  Also, if you see the Comodo RSA Certification Authority (issued to and issued by Comodo RSA Certification Authority with an expiration date of January 18, 2038) is present, if it is please delete this certificate.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;If any of these certificates are missing  the intermediate and root certificates were provided to you in the .zip file when the certificate was issued, or are available via this support article - &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;https://support.comodo.com/index.php?/Default/Knowledgebase/Article/View/979/108/domain-validation-sha-2&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; .&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;If you had to delete the Comodo RSA Certification Authority from the Trusted Root Authorities folder, you will also need to disable automatic root certificate updates on the server - https://support.comodo.com/index.php?/Default/Knowledgebase/Article/View/769/17/turn-off-automatic-root-certificates-updates-server-2008&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;If you have performed these steps and the certificate chain has not updated on the server, to force IIS to update the certificate chain you will need to either change the certificate binding in IIS to another certificate, and then switch the certificate bindings to the correct certificate. Alternately, you will need to restart the server.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;Conservation for https://support.comodo.com/index.php?/Default/Knowledgebase/Article/View/769/17/turn-off-automatic-root-certificates-updates-server-2008&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;To perform this procedure, you must be a member of the local Administrators group, or you must have been delegated the appropriate authority.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;To turn off Automatic Root Certificates Update:&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;1. Click Start, and then click Run.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;2. Type gpedit.msc, and then click OK.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;3. If the User Account Control dialog box appears, confirm that the action it displays is what you want, and then click Continue.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;4. Double-click Administrative Templates, double-click System, double-click Internet Communication Management, and then click Internet Communication settings.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;5. Double-click Turn off Automatic Root Certificates Update, click Enabled, and then click OK.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;6. Close the Local Group Policy Editor.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;Note: You can use Group Policy to set policy settings that apply across a given site, domain, or organizational unit in Active Directory Domain Services.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmh</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=App&amp;diff=1236</id>
		<title>App</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=App&amp;diff=1236"/>
		<updated>2018-04-23T14:49:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmh: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:UMS School App.png|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
UMS School App is available for iPhone, Android and Windows Phone. It will be designed with the school’s own logo, color and style. The app gives the basic functionality to see:&lt;br /&gt;
*News&lt;br /&gt;
*Timetable&lt;br /&gt;
*Homework&lt;br /&gt;
*Grades&lt;br /&gt;
*User information&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additional licenses gives the ability to create, edit and see more information from various modules. For an overview of module requirement see &amp;quot;[http://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=App&amp;amp;section=6&amp;amp;wteswitched=1#Additional_functionality Additional functionality&amp;quot;]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support ==&lt;br /&gt;
We provide regular support for the following and newer versions:&lt;br /&gt;
* Android version 5.1. We support the same versions as Google provide security updates for. Find an overview [[wikipedia:Android_version_history|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* iOS version 10 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Windows 10 Mobile (version 10)&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that it is possible to run older versions. If support for older versions is needed, we offer support at our hourly rate. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Prerequisites ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Supported administrative systems ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Userinfo: Easy-A, SIS and Lectio (Only mobile number).&lt;br /&gt;
*Grades: Easy-A, Lectio and SIS&lt;br /&gt;
*Homework: Easy-A and SIS.&lt;br /&gt;
*Timetable: Easy-A and SIS&lt;br /&gt;
*Attendance registration: Timetable data is retrieved from Easy-A, SIS, LUDUS, Tabulex and Lectio. Howerver, absence is only registered to Easy-A&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Module requirements ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*UMS Web (contains and run all the webservice that is required for the app to receive information and communicate with the server)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Additional functionality ===&lt;br /&gt;
You get more functionality in the app by having the following modules, these are all optional:&lt;br /&gt;
*Attendance Registration: Gives “Your attendance”, which shows student statistics, the student are able to add absence reason and see their absence status in the timetable&lt;br /&gt;
*Attendance Registration for UMS School App: gives employee “attendance registration” and student the ability to &amp;quot;report absence&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*Homework: gives the employee the ability to create homework&lt;br /&gt;
*Link Collection: gives links/bookmarks the school can setup&lt;br /&gt;
*User info: gives “Your information” the ability to edit the information. This also adds the functionality for the user to upload a new profile image (a selfie) to be used in the student id card&lt;br /&gt;
*Student &amp;amp; Employee Id: Gives the students a “student id card” and the employees an “employee id card”. To update their student id card profile image you’ll need the “User info” module&lt;br /&gt;
*Parking: Parkzone &amp;amp; APCOA Integration. Gives the option to create and edit parking permits from Parkzone and APCOA&lt;br /&gt;
*User information (add/edit)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: All Attendance functionality requires Attendance Registration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Testing after setup ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The app will be tested internally at inLogic before release. The test requires access to a user with relevant data. You can either create a fictional student who is associated to a real course, or alternatively use a real student&#039;s account, if the person agrees that the account is being used for a system test of the school&#039;s APP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== What to have ready ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Important&#039;&#039;&#039;: The UMS site needs to use HTTPS and be public available. It needs a valid SSL certificate.&lt;br /&gt;
*Materials that can be used for designing the app. For example: Logo, brochure, design guide line, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Optional: It is possible for the school to have its own account where the app is located. An account in the App Store cost $99 per year, while an account for Google Play costs a onetime fee of $25. The school self-manage these accounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Physical hardware requirements ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Having a smartphone is a necessity, either an Android, iOS or a Windows 10 Mobile.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Should third party be contacted ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the school is using a dedicated hosting service, they have to be informed on how you wish the news feed should be setup.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Styling ==&lt;br /&gt;
To style the app we need the following:&lt;br /&gt;
* Primary color&lt;br /&gt;
* Secondary color&lt;br /&gt;
* Logo (vector file: .psd, .ai etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
* Icon (vector file: .psd, .ai etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The primary color will mostly be used for all static view. Secondary color will be used when something is active or being activated like a button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Optional:&lt;br /&gt;
* Background image for login view (size 1080x1920)&lt;br /&gt;
* Background image for top bar of menu (size 1080x480)&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App loginwithbaggrund.png|left|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App menuwithbaggrund.png|none|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Installation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Provide the [[UMS Web]] url path to inLogic (+4542408815). If you are running any kind of gateway (TMG, UAG etc.) you will need to create rules for the services on UMS Web, contact us for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
inLogic will publish the app either through inLogics account or your schools own account if you have acquired one. If you have your own account inLogic needs to be informed as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Technical settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each chapter only covers specific configuration that involves and applies to the app. For a full detail guide for each module open the corresponding manual. This manual also doesn’t include how to setup schedules task and services that isn’t directly affiliated with the app, the only exception is the service “UMS RSS Feeds” that is specific for the app.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you can’t find the module you’re looking for in this guide please search for the page. E.g. ParkZone is not describe in this guide as there is no specific configuration that will affect the app alone. Be aware that some changes in the configurator listed in this guide will not only effect the app but also the UMS Web for that specific module.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important&#039;&#039;&#039; Most changes will require an IIS reset on the server before it will take effect due to many settings is only loaded once when the website is initializing. The app retrieves settings from UMS once a day, so when you make a change it will take effect in the app the next day or when you log in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Menu Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You are able to set the order and which menu buttons should be shown per template for the users&lt;br /&gt;
#Open UMS Configurator&lt;br /&gt;
#Templates -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; select a template -&amp;gt; App&lt;br /&gt;
#Under Menu order select Manage -&amp;gt; Add&lt;br /&gt;
#Write a Description&lt;br /&gt;
#Drap and drop the menu you want&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MeunOrderSettings.png|none|thumb|491x491px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Here three menubuttons will be visible to the users on that specific template.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== News ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This describes how to setup news for the app.&lt;br /&gt;
* App News created from UMS Web&lt;br /&gt;
* Add a RSS feed&lt;br /&gt;
* Add Facebook feed&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to use all three setups together. Combine as you like and set difference feed for difference templates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Setup for App News from UMS Web ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to create or use an existing AD group. This group will have access to create and modify news in&lt;br /&gt;
App News on UMS Web.&lt;br /&gt;
#Open UMS Configurator&lt;br /&gt;
#Menu -&amp;gt; Web Setup -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; App&lt;br /&gt;
#Add the AD group for News Access group&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App newsaccessgroup.png|none|thumb|488x488px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Setup for RSS feed ====&lt;br /&gt;
Add server name for the service for RSS feed in Menu -&amp;gt; Modules -&amp;gt; Settings -&amp;gt; RSS Feeds&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App rssfeedservice.png|thumb|none|496x496px]]&lt;br /&gt;
To setup Rss feed you will need the url for the rss. (E.g. http://inlogic.dk/feed)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Menu -&amp;gt; Templates -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; select template -&amp;gt; Rss Feeds&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Manage -&amp;gt; Add… -&amp;gt; Fill in description, feed url and access token&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App rssfeedurl.png|none|thumb|503x503px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; You only need an access token if the feed is from Facebook&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The RSS feed runs as a service called “UMS RSS Feeds”. Default running every 5 min.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App services.png|none|thumb|510x510px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Restart the service to test it and check the output in /UserManagement/RSSFeeds.Log&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App rssfeedlog.png|none|thumb|511x511px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Setup for Facebook news ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to use a Facebook page news feed, you need two things:&lt;br /&gt;
*Facebook Page Url Feed&lt;br /&gt;
*Access Token&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Facebook Page Url Feed =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create the feed url&lt;br /&gt;
#Get your facebook page url&lt;br /&gt;
#*E.g. https://www.facebook.com/inlogic.dk&lt;br /&gt;
#Copy the name. E.g. “inlogic.dk”&lt;br /&gt;
#*Note: this can also be a number “142642699097242”&lt;br /&gt;
#Replace “inlogic.dk” with your name in this url&lt;br /&gt;
#*https://graph.facebook.com/v2.8/inlogic.dk/&lt;br /&gt;
Your facebook page url feed should look something like this:&lt;br /&gt;
*https://graph.facebook.com/v2.8/schoolname/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is your feed URL. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Create a facebook access token =====&lt;br /&gt;
The personal Facebook account that you use to register as a developer does not need to be associated in any way with the page or group whose posts you want to display. You cannot log in to the Developer site using a Facebook Page or Business account. You must use the username and password from your personal Facebook profile. Facebook doesn’t allow businesses to register as developers, only individuals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please follow [https://developers.facebook.com/docs/apps/register Facebook guide] to enable yourself as developer on facebook.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you have a facebook developer account and created an app go to [https://developers.facebook.com/tools/explorer Facebook Graph Explorer]&lt;br /&gt;
#Select application&lt;br /&gt;
#Select “Get Token” and “Get App Token”&lt;br /&gt;
#Copy the Access Token&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App facebookgettoken.png|none|thumb|532x532px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Now you have the access token you need to paste into the configurator.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App rssfeedurl.png|none|thumb|604x604px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Reload the service UMS Rss Feed in Services and look in the RSS Feed log to validate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Grades ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can set the default view for grades, that filters the grades accordingly. The options are Course, Day and period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Configurator -&amp;gt; Web Setup -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; App -&amp;gt; Default grade view&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App gradesview.png|none|thumb|476x476px]]&lt;br /&gt;
To specific the period you can set how your terms are set with start and end day for each period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Configurator -&amp;gt; Modules -&amp;gt; Grades -&amp;gt; Select the Datasource -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; Terms&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App gradesterms.png|none|thumb|481x481px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on which administration system you’re exporting grades from the columns can vary. You can set which grades column should be used and in which order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Configurator -&amp;gt; Web Setup -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; App -&amp;gt; Select grade columns&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App gradescolumns.png|none|thumb|482x482px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Grades in the app&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The grades view in the App will change accordingly to which columns chosen, a max of 4 columns will be shown in the App. The columns will be shown for each grade in order from 1 to 4.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Your information ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can select which fields in user information that should be editable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Configurator -&amp;gt; Web Setup -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; Userinfo&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App userinfo.png|none|thumb|496x496px]]&lt;br /&gt;
You need to set permission before the users are able to upload their own student photo (a selfie).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Configurator -&amp;gt; Web Setup -&amp;gt; Edit -&amp;gt; UMS Photo -&amp;gt; Enable Selfie in App&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App userinfoselfie.png|none|thumb|503x503px]]&lt;br /&gt;
This will enable selfie function.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Student ID And Employee ID ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Student ID uses user information and UMS Photo and has no configuration specific for the app.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make sure Anonymous Authentication is enabled for the folder ‘Webservices’ in Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager for the Default Web Site&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To let the users change their student ID card profile image go to the chapter for [[My Information]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Student ID Barcode ====&lt;br /&gt;
Only students imported from Lectio will have a Card ID set by default. Note that not all card IDs can be displayed in all formats. You can set a default bar code format which the students Card ID will be shown as.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Web tasks -&amp;gt; Web setup -&amp;gt; General settings (scroll to bottom)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the barcode format that your scanners support.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Available barcode formats.png|thumb|318x318px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== My Absence ===&lt;br /&gt;
----The students are able to write an absence reason on an already registered subject. This can be enabled in the template editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the template -&amp;gt; Absence -&amp;gt; Manage -&amp;gt; Create a new settings or select an existing one -&amp;gt; Add/Edit&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Check &amp;quot;Allow students to register absence reason&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Absence settings.png|none|thumb|435x435px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Allow students to register absence reason&#039;&#039;&#039; will allow the students to set an absence reason when a teacher has set the student as absent. The student can set an absence reason in &amp;quot;My absence&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Days back&#039;&#039;&#039; is the number of days back the students are allowed to set an absence reason.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Show Course&#039;&#039;&#039; will show the course view (this will effect both web and app).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Show Activity&#039;&#039;&#039; will show the activity view (this will effect both web and app).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Push Notification ===&lt;br /&gt;
----UMS can send push notifications when there are news, grades, or changes in your timetable. It is possible to receive a daily notification with your timetable for the day.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition the app can receive [[SMS Alert]] messages. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Web Setup -&amp;gt; App -&amp;gt; Manage -&amp;gt; Add&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AppPushNotificationSettings.png|none|thumb|383x383px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set the description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
FCM Server Api Key:&lt;br /&gt;
# Receive the key string from inLogic and paste it&lt;br /&gt;
Windows Phone:&lt;br /&gt;
# Receive the Package SID and Client secret from inLogic and paste the strings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== School account ====&lt;br /&gt;
In case the school has it&#039;s own account do the following to retrieve the information&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
FCM Server Api Key:&lt;br /&gt;
# Open https://play.google.com/apps/publish&lt;br /&gt;
# Google Play Console -&amp;gt; Settings -&amp;gt; API Access -&amp;gt; Create linked project and open it -&amp;gt; Credentials&lt;br /&gt;
# Create API Key&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the API Key and make key restriction for Android&lt;br /&gt;
# Type in your package name and SHA-1 certificate fingerprint&lt;br /&gt;
# Copy the API key and paste it inside FCM Server API Key&lt;br /&gt;
Windows Phone:&lt;br /&gt;
# Open https://developer.microsoft.com/en-us/dashboard/apps/overview&lt;br /&gt;
# Select your app&lt;br /&gt;
# Services -&amp;gt; Push notification -&amp;gt; WNS/MPNS&lt;br /&gt;
# Select &amp;quot;Live Services site&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Copy and paste the Package SID into the configurator&lt;br /&gt;
# Generate an Application Secret if none exist&lt;br /&gt;
# Copy and paste the Application Secret into the configurator (This is the Client Secret)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Links ===&lt;br /&gt;
----[[UMS Links]] can be used by both UMS Web and UMS App. Check the [[UMS Links|guide]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Homework ===&lt;br /&gt;
----See [[UMS Homework]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Parking ===&lt;br /&gt;
----See [[Parking]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Notify absence ===&lt;br /&gt;
----See [[Attendance Registration#SMS and App settings for notify absence|App settings for notify absence in attendance registration]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sms Alert ===&lt;br /&gt;
----See [[SMS Alert]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== FAQ ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Untrusted Certificate Error on Android ===&lt;br /&gt;
Can&#039;t login on older Android mobile running a version between 4.1 and 5.1? This could be due to an untrusted Comodo SSL Certificate. We were able to reproduced it on Android version 4.1, 4.4.2 and 5.0.1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can test your SSL certificate on https://sslanalyzer.comodoca.com/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do the following on the server&lt;br /&gt;
# Delete the Comodo RSA Certification Authority issued by Comodo RSA Certification Authority with an expiration date of January 18, 2038.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enable automatic root certificate updates on the server&lt;br /&gt;
Please checkout the Comodo support site: https://support.comodo.com/index.php?/Knowledgebase/Article/View/1019/38/untrusted-certificate-error-on-android&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For future conservation:&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;Certificate is not installed correctly; the certificate needs to be chained back to the Addtrust root certificate in order to be trusted on the Android.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;The issue is that the Windows server is not presenting the complete certificate chain; clients which do not have the complete certificate chain will result in this error as encountered on the Android phone. In order to resolve this, on the server which this certificate is installed on, please open the MMC (Microsoft Management Console), and add the certificate snap-in for the computer account on the local computer.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;In the Intermediate Certification Authorities folder, verify if the Comodo RSA Domain Validation Secure Server CA and Comodo RSA Certification Authority(issued to Comodo RSA Certification Authority, issued by AddTrustExternal CA Root) are installed in this certificate store.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;In the Trusted Root Certification Authorities folder verify if the AddTrustExternal CA Root is installed.  Also, if you see the Comodo RSA Certification Authority (issued to and issued by Comodo RSA Certification Authority with an expiration date of January 18, 2038) is present, if it is please delete this certificate.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;If any of these certificates are missing  the intermediate and root certificates were provided to you in the .zip file when the certificate was issued, or are available via this support article - &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;https://support.comodo.com/index.php?/Default/Knowledgebase/Article/View/979/108/domain-validation-sha-2&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; .&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;If you had to delete the Comodo RSA Certification Authority from the Trusted Root Authorities folder, you will also need to disable automatic root certificate updates on the server - https://support.comodo.com/index.php?/Default/Knowledgebase/Article/View/769/17/turn-off-automatic-root-certificates-updates-server-2008&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;If you have performed these steps and the certificate chain has not updated on the server, to force IIS to update the certificate chain you will need to either change the certificate binding in IIS to another certificate, and then switch the certificate bindings to the correct certificate. Alternately, you will need to restart the server.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;Conservation for https://support.comodo.com/index.php?/Default/Knowledgebase/Article/View/769/17/turn-off-automatic-root-certificates-updates-server-2008&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;To perform this procedure, you must be a member of the local Administrators group, or you must have been delegated the appropriate authority.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;To turn off Automatic Root Certificates Update:&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;1. Click Start, and then click Run.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;2. Type gpedit.msc, and then click OK.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;3. If the User Account Control dialog box appears, confirm that the action it displays is what you want, and then click Continue.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;4. Double-click Administrative Templates, double-click System, double-click Internet Communication Management, and then click Internet Communication settings.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;5. Double-click Turn off Automatic Root Certificates Update, click Enabled, and then click OK.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;6. Close the Local Group Policy Editor.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;Note: You can use Group Policy to set policy settings that apply across a given site, domain, or organizational unit in Active Directory Domain Services.&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmh</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=Attendance_Registration_Card_System&amp;diff=1231</id>
		<title>Attendance Registration Card System</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=Attendance_Registration_Card_System&amp;diff=1231"/>
		<updated>2018-04-13T08:40:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmh: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Attendance Registration Card System is a system developed for schools. The system allows students to register their own attendance with i.e. their Student ID card. The students can swipe their card to check in when they arrive at the school and check out when they leave again. The card system makes it is easy to monitor the students’ attendance, as all card registrations automatically will be available in [[UMS]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Through the user-friendly interface, the teacher can see if everyone have registered correctly and make corrections if necessary. We currently integrate with Buanco card system. If you need integration to another card system, please contact us for price and availability.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Prerequisites ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Supported administrative systems ===&lt;br /&gt;
All&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Module requirements ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[UMS]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Attendance Registration]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Attendance Registration Advanced]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Testing after setup ===&lt;br /&gt;
UMS can receive card information from the external card system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== What to have ready ===&lt;br /&gt;
An external card system with terminals (eg. Buanco). The card system must be able to exchange card information with UMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Is any physical item required ===&lt;br /&gt;
External card system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Should third party be contacted ===&lt;br /&gt;
Card system supplier regarding exchanging card data with UMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Installation ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configurations ===&lt;br /&gt;
Settings can be found under &#039;Modules\Absence\Card servers&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Absencecardcardservers.png|none|thumb|550x550px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
UMS currently supports 2 different card systems:&lt;br /&gt;
* Buanco: Covers card systems from Buanco.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* inLogic: All other card systems.&lt;br /&gt;
== Technical settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
All card systems supported by UMS works with a web service running on the card system server. UMS will on a regular basis retrieve new card entries.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that UMS only supports one card system per installation. It is possible to apply the card systems for selected students or departments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose the relevant card system and click add. See below.[[File:Absencecardcardserverssettings.png|none|thumb|534x534px]]Enter the necessary information for the card system that are used. See below.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;Description&#039;: Enter a description for the system&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;Server/URL&#039;: Enter a server address for the server that delivers the data (IP or DNS). If inLogic is chosen for the card system then enter the URL used for data-retrieval&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;Username/Password/Domain&#039;: Enter credentials for the user, which is used for retrieving the data&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;DB Field&#039;: Choose which field used to identify/match the card user to a UMS created user/student. The field used will be different for each system but CPR/SSN is typically used&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Absencecardadd.png|none|thumb|359x359px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Service setup ===&lt;br /&gt;
After the card system settings have been created, it is also necessary to ensure that the service retrieving the card data is running. Services are controlled through the menu &#039;Settings\Services&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a valid server name under &#039;Absence card import server&#039;. The server needs to have UMS installed, as well as IP access to the card servers web service.[[File:Absencecardservicessetup.png|none|thumb|619x619px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, you need to ensure that the absence settings for each template is using cards. You can access it under &#039;Templates\Edit&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Absencecardtemplateeditor.png|none|thumb|629x629px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Simply check the box &#039;Use cards&#039; on all templates where the card system is used.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Absencecardmanage.png|none|thumb|539x539px]]  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== FAQ ==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmh</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=Attendance_Registration_Card_System&amp;diff=1230</id>
		<title>Attendance Registration Card System</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.inlogic.dk/index.php?title=Attendance_Registration_Card_System&amp;diff=1230"/>
		<updated>2018-04-13T08:39:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mmh: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Attendance Registration Card System is a system developed for schools. The system allows students to register their own attendance with i.e. their Student ID card. The students can swipe their card to check in when they arrive at the school and check out when they leave again. The card system makes it is easy to monitor the students’ attendance, as all card registrations automatically will be available in [[UMS]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Through the user-friendly interface, the teacher can see if everyone has registered correctly and make corrections if necessary. We currently integrate with Buanco card system. If you need integration to another card system, please contact us for price and availability.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Prerequisites ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Supported administrative systems ===&lt;br /&gt;
All&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Module requirements ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[UMS]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Attendance Registration]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Attendance Registration Advanced]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Testing after setup ===&lt;br /&gt;
UMS can receive card information from the external card system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== What to have ready ===&lt;br /&gt;
An external card system with terminals (eg. Buanco). The card system must be able to exchange card information with UMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Is any physical item required ===&lt;br /&gt;
External card system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Should third party be contacted ===&lt;br /&gt;
Card system supplier regarding exchanging card data with UMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Installation ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configurations ===&lt;br /&gt;
Settings can be found under &#039;Modules\Absence\Card servers&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Absencecardcardservers.png|none|thumb|550x550px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
UMS currently supports 2 different card systems:&lt;br /&gt;
* Buanco: Covers card systems from Buanco.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* inLogic: All other card systems.&lt;br /&gt;
== Technical settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
All card systems supported by UMS works with a web service running on the card system server. UMS will on a regular basis retrieve new card entries.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that UMS only supports one card system per installation. It is possible to apply the card systems for selected students or departments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose the relevant card system and click add. See below.[[File:Absencecardcardserverssettings.png|none|thumb|534x534px]]Enter the necessary information for the card system that are used. See below.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;Description&#039;: Enter a description for the system&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;Server/URL&#039;: Enter a server address for the server that delivers the data (IP or DNS). If inLogic is chosen for the card system then enter the URL used for data-retrieval&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;Username/Password/Domain&#039;: Enter credentials for the user, which is used for retrieving the data&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;DB Field&#039;: Choose which field used to identify/match the card user to a UMS created user/student. The field used will be different for each system but CPR/SSN is typically used&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Absencecardadd.png|none|thumb|359x359px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Service setup ===&lt;br /&gt;
After the card system settings have been created, it is also necessary to ensure that the service retrieving the card data is running. Services are controlled through the menu &#039;Settings\Services&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter a valid server name under &#039;Absence card import server&#039;. The server needs to have UMS installed, as well as IP access to the card servers web service.[[File:Absencecardservicessetup.png|none|thumb|619x619px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, you need to ensure that the absence settings for each template is using cards. You can access it under &#039;Templates\Edit&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Absencecardtemplateeditor.png|none|thumb|629x629px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Simply check the box &#039;Use cards&#039; on all templates where the card system is used.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Absencecardmanage.png|none|thumb|539x539px]]  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== FAQ ==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mmh</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>